JP6644986B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  In a pachinko game machine or a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, separately from a display device for displaying a variation display of symbols and a game-related effect image, a light guide plate having a light transmitting property and an end face of the light guide plate And a display device that emits light having a pattern formed on the front surface or the rear surface of the light guide plate by light incident on the inside of the light guide plate.

  In addition, among gaming machines provided with this type of display device, there has been a gaming machine in which a movable body is provided on the rear side of a light guide plate so as to be movable so as not to contact the light guide plate (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-150171

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, since the movable body is not related to the light emission effect of causing the light guide plate to emit light, there is a problem that the effect of the effect using the movable body is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of a light emitting effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols and effect symbols, etc.) and derive and display display results (big hit display results, loss display results). (For example, the first movable body 302L, 302R, the second movable body 402) and a predetermined light guide pattern (for example, the light from the light guide plate LED502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a is forwarded). A light guide pattern (for example, a light guide plate 501) disposed on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the movable body, and displayed after the variable display is started. Until the results are derived and displayed, the special effects of temporarily stopping the variable display and then restarting the variable display (see FIGS. 46 (E) to (G), (H), (I) or (J), (K) Variation display of pseudo-run Special effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, etc.) capable of executing the above, and a change corresponding display capable of performing a change corresponding display corresponding to the change display (active display AH in FIG. 46, etc.). Means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, etc.) and mode changing means (active change) for changing the mode of the change corresponding display to one of a plurality of modes (active change) during execution of the change display. The control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, S641, S642, and S643 in FIG. 60), and a change suggestion effect (slots in FIGS. 46 (E) to (I)) suggesting that the mode of the change corresponding display changes. And the suggestion effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115, S644 and S645 in FIG. 60) capable of executing Light emission effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115 or the like) capable of executing a light emission effect for emitting the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide unit during at least a part of the moving period of the moving body, The degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player differs depending on the mode of the change correspondence display, and the special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effects (the same color pattern in FIG. 54 (A)). Effect , NEXT symbol effect, etc.), as a mode of temporary stop, a mode of a look-ahead effect performed based on a result of a look-ahead determination by a look-ahead determination unit that performs a look-ahead determination on a variable display that has not been started yet. There is a common mode at least partially common to the first special effect in which the mode at the time of temporary stop is the common mode, and the second special effect in which the mode at the time of temporary stop is different from the common mode. Depending on which type of the special effect, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs, and when the special effect is executed, the change suggestion effect is executed according to the type of the special effect. that the ratio Ri is Do different (as shown in FIG. 54 (B), depending on the effect type of the same color pattern effect and NEXT symbols effect in the pseudo communication, such execution ratio of active changes suggest effect is different), the special effect execution means Is the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, the first special effect so as to be higher than the degree of expectation corresponding to the look-ahead effect performed before the first special effect is executed Can be executed .

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to visually recognize the movement of the movable body when the light-emitting effect is performed, so that the effect can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols and effect symbols, etc.) and derive and display display results (big hit display results, loss display results). (For example, the first movable body 302L, 302R, the second movable body 402) and a predetermined light guide pattern (for example, the light from the light guide plate LED502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a is forwarded). A light guide pattern (for example, a light guide plate 501) disposed on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the movable body, and displayed after the variable display is started. Until the results are derived and displayed, the special effects of temporarily stopping the variable display and then restarting the variable display (see FIGS. 46 (E) to (G), (H), (I) or (J), (K) Variation display of pseudo-run Special effect executing means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, etc.) capable of executing the above, and a change corresponding display capable of performing a change corresponding display (active display AH, etc. in FIG. 46) corresponding to the change display. Means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, etc.) and mode changing means (active change) for changing (active change) the mode of the change corresponding display to any of a plurality of modes during execution of the change display. The control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, S641, S642, and S643 in FIG. 60), and a change suggestion effect (slots in FIGS. 46 (E) to (I)) suggesting that the mode of the change corresponding display changes. And the suggestion effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115, S644 and S645 in FIG. 60) capable of executing Light emission effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115 or the like) capable of executing a light emission effect of emitting the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide unit during at least a part of the moving period of the moving object, The degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs depending on the mode of the change correspondence display, and the special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effects (the same color pattern in FIG. 54 (A)). Effect, NEXT symbol effect, etc.), as a mode of temporary stop, a mode of a look-ahead effect performed based on a result of the look-ahead determination by a look-ahead determination unit that performs a look-ahead determination on a variable display that has not been started yet. There is a common mode at least partially common to the first special effect in which the mode at the time of temporary stop is the common mode, and the second special effect in which the mode at the time of temporary stop is different from the common mode . Depending on which type of the special effect, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state differs, and when the special effect is executed, the change suggestion effect is executed according to the type of the special effect. The rate of change in the display mode of the fluctuation corresponding display after the execution is different (as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the execution of the active change effect in accordance with the effect type such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo-run). The special effect execution means, the special effect execution means is an expected degree controlled to the advantageous state and is equal to or more than the expected degree corresponding to the look-ahead effect executed before the first special effect is executed. The first special effect can be executed so as to have an expected degree.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to visually recognize the movement of the movable body when the light-emitting effect is performed, so that the effect can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The light emission effect is executed from before the start of the movement of the movable bodies (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the second movable body 402) to after the end thereof (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body). The light emission effect is performed by the light guide plate 501 from before the start to the end of the movement of the 402. (See FIG. 23A and FIGS. 26 to 29).

  According to such a configuration, the movement of the movable body is completed when the light emission effect ends, and the movement of the movable body is more difficult to visually recognize, so that the effect can be improved.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (2),
A mode determining unit that determines the light emission mode of the light emission effect from any of a plurality of types (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the light emission effect of the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 to a white pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to emit white light). , The light guide plate 501 emits red light, or the flash pattern causes the light guide plate 501 to blink and emit light. See FIG. 22) and an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player. (For example, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated, the big hit display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display. Is performed (lottery) to determine whether to derive and display the game, and if the variable display result is "big hit", the big hit game The big win opening / closing process, the big hit opening process, the big hit opening process, and the big hit end process.) The light emission mode is determined according to whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission mode according to whether or not the CPU 103 is controlled to the big hit game state). In the light emission effect, light may be emitted in the light emission mode determined by the mode determination means (for example, in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, light may be emitted in the light emission mode determined by the effect control CPU 120; see FIG. 22). .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an expectation in accordance with the type of the light emitting mode, so that the interest can be improved.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The gaming machine includes a display unit (for example, the effect display device 5), and the movable body has a light emitting unit (for example, the movable LEDs 307L and 307R, and the movable LEDs 407A to 407D). Turn off the display means and the light emitting portion of the movable body (for example, when performing a light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501, the effect display device 5 and each movable body LED 307L of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402). , 307R and the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D are turned off (see FIGS. 26 to 28).

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the movement of the movable body can be further reduced while enhancing the effect of the light emission effect.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The movable body (for example, the second movable body 402) is a part for moving the movable body, and is a moving mechanism part at least partially visible to a player when the movable body is moving at least. (E.g., a mechanism portion E), and the predetermined light guide pattern is disposed in front of a moving area of the moving mechanism on the movable body (e.g., the predetermined light guide pattern is a second movable body 402). May be disposed in front of the movement area of the mechanism part E in (see FIG. 22).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the moving mechanism of the movable body by the light emission effect.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The movable body has a light emitting unit (for example, movable LEDs 307L and 307R, movable LEDs 407A to 407D), and the light guide unit includes a formation region (for example, a light emitting region 506) for forming the predetermined light guide pattern. A non-forming region (for example, non-light-emitting portions 507A to 507E / non-light-emitting portion 507F in the non-light-emitting region 507) in which the predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, and the light-emitting portion corresponds to the non-forming region. By operating the movable body in the arranged state, it is possible to execute a light emission effect by the light emitting unit and the light guide unit (for example, each movable body LED 307L, 307R and each movable body corresponding to the non-light emitting units 507A to 507E). The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are operated in a state where the body LEDs 407A to 407D are arranged, and each movable body LED 307L is operated. 307R and is capable of executing emission effect by the movable member LED407A~407D and the light guide plate 501. See FIG. 29), it may be.

  According to such a configuration, not only the light guide portion can emit light in the formation region, but also the non-formation region can emit light in the light emitting portion of the movable body, so that the effect of the light emission effect can be improved. it can.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (8) to (14). 2. Description of the Related Art As a game machine of this type generally known, there has been one capable of performing a variable display (also referred to as a variable display) and deriving and displaying a display result. In some gaming machines, during the execution of the fluctuation display, a fluctuation corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the fluctuation display can be performed. Also, some gaming machines are capable of performing a special effect (pseudo continuous effect) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed after the variable display is started and before the display result is derived and displayed. there were.

  As a gaming machine that performs a special effect and a display corresponding to a change, as described in JP-A-2015-128537 (paragraphs 0174, 0175, 0453, etc.), a display corresponding to a change is executed in a change display period including a special effect, and In some cases, the rate at which the change corresponding display changes varies depending on the timing at which the corresponding display is executed (Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, a suggestion effect indicating that the change corresponding display changes can be executed. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2015-128537 described above, there is a problem that the relevance between the special effect and the effect suggesting the change in the change corresponding display is poor, and it is not sufficient to enhance the interest of the effect. there were.

  The inventions according to (8) to (14) have been devised in view of such circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in special effects and suggestive effects. .

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The suggestion effect execution means executes a change suggestion effect selected from a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (S645 in FIG. 60, etc.), and executes a specific change suggestion effect among the plurality of types of change suggestion effects. The ratio varies depending on the type of the special effect (as shown in FIG. 59, among a plurality of types of active change suggestion effect patterns such as a slot effect and an effect effect, a specific active effect such as a slot effect and an effect effect). The rate at which the change suggestion effect pattern is executed may be configured so as to differ depending on the effect type of the pseudo-series such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the type of the special effect.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8),
A look-ahead determination means (game control microcomputer 100, S1215, S1225 in FIG. 42, effect control microcomputer 115, S713-S718 in FIG. 52, etc.) for performing a look-ahead determination on a variable display that has not yet been started, and the look-ahead determination Means for executing a look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead determination by the means (the effect control microcomputer 115, S721 to S730 in FIG. 52, S632 in FIG. 60, etc.), and the special effect execution means It is possible to execute a common mode special effect in which the special effect is performed in an effect mode at least partly common to the effect mode of the look-ahead effect (the same color pattern effect is executed as a look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46 (H), the same color pattern effect can be executed as a pseudo continuous effect. It may be configured to.

  According to such a configuration, when a special effect is being performed, a player may have an illusion that the prefetching effect is being performed. It is possible to further enhance the interest in the production.

(10) The gaming machine according to (9),
The look-ahead effect means can execute a look-ahead effect in a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (big hit game state or the like) which is advantageous to the player (blue-colored effect, green-colored effect in FIG. 48). The special-effects execution means is different in the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state, such as the effect and the look-ahead effect in which the degree of expectation controlled in the big hit game state is different, such as in the same color red effect). The special effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes (simulated reams with different degrees of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state are executed, such as the same color blue effect, the same green color effect, and the same red color effect in FIG. 55). The special effect is executed in an effect mode having an expected degree equal to or higher than the expected degree in the effect mode of the look-ahead effect executed before the variable display for executing the common mode special effect is executed. No. (Similar to blue-colored, green-colored, and red-colored effects in FIG. 55, the big-hit expectation of the same-color design effect pattern executed at the time of the pre-reading effect according to the same-color pattern effect pattern history at the time of the prefetching effect) The effect of pseudo-ream can be executed with the same color design effect pattern having the degree of expectation equal to or higher than the degree.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a special effect is performed in an effect mode with an expected degree higher than the expected degree in the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, and to enhance interest in these effects. Can be done.

(11) The gaming machine according to (10) above,
Hold display means (production control microcomputer 115, S700 in FIG. 45, S730 in FIG. 52, main effect display device 9A, etc.) for displaying a variable display that has not yet started as a hold display (hold display H in FIG. 46). ) And a change in the hold display mode (such as a hold change effect in FIGS. 46 (A) to (D)) included in the look-ahead effect and changing the mode of the hold display can be executed as the look-ahead effect. Hold display mode changing means (microcomputer 115 for effect control, S727 and S725 in FIG. 52, S632 in FIG. 60, etc.) and a change suggestion effect indicating that the change of the hold display mode is executed (FIGS. 46 and 51). Hold effect suggestion effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115, S728 in FIG. 52) capable of executing the slot effect, action effect, etc. 60, etc.), and when the common mode special effect is executed in the variable display, the suggestion effect execution means is executed by the hold change suggestion effect execution device before the variable display is executed. It is possible to execute the change suggestion effect in a mode in which the performed change suggestion effect is taken over (FIGS. 46A to 46D). ) To (I), as shown in the active change suggestion effect pattern at the time of the pseudo continuous effect in FIG. 59, the change suggestion effect at the time of the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in a mode in which the change suggestion effect at the time of the pre-reading effect is taken over. Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the look-ahead effect and the special effect can be set as a series of effect modes, and the interest in these effects can be improved.

(12) The gaming machine according to (11) above,
The hold change suggestion effect execution means and the suggestion effect execution means are stepwise when the change suggestion effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays by the hold change suggestion effect execution means and the suggestion effect execution means. (FIG. 46, FIG. 49 to FIG. 50, and FIG. 56 to FIG. 58, the hold display and the active display change after the hold display and then the active display also change). And so on).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stage to which the mode of the corresponding display changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect.

(13) The gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12),
Holding display means (the effect control microcomputer 115, the main effect display device 9A, etc. of the fourth embodiment) for displaying a variable display that has not yet been started as a hold display (such as a hold display of the fourth embodiment); On-hold display mode changing means (for effect control of the fourth embodiment) which is included in the pre-reading effect module and is capable of executing a on-hold display mode change (such as a change-on-hold effect) in which the mode of the on-hold display is changed as the pre-fetch effect. Microcomputer 115), wherein the on-hold display mode changing unit and the on-state changing unit are different when changing the mode of the on-hold display mode and when changing the mode of the change corresponding display mode. A type of change effect can be executed (for example, as shown in the fourth embodiment, the effect controlling microcomputer 115 In the case of changing the display mode of the active display, as in the case of "change at shift" at the start of the change, "lightning action effect", "mechanical action effect" in the middle period of the change, and "after reach" in the latter period of the change. 61A to 61C, when the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed, as shown in FIGS. "Lightning action effect", "Movement effect effect" in the middle period of fluctuation, "Character effect effect A", and "Hold change design effect effect" and "Character effect effect B" in the latter period of fluctuation can be executed). It may be.

  According to such a configuration, the type of the change effect is different between when the mode of the hold display is changed and when the mode of the change corresponding display is changed, so that the effect of the change effect can be improved.

(14) The gaming machine according to any of (1) to (13) above,
The special effect execution means may be configured to vary a part of the effect mode after the end of the special effect according to the type of the special effect (third embodiment).

  According to such a configuration, the effect of the special effect can be further enhanced.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on a main board. It is a front view showing a 1st production unit and a 2nd production unit. (A) is a front view showing a first effect unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the first effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the composition of the 1st production unit seen from diagonally front. It is an exploded perspective view showing the state of the composition of the 1st production unit seen from slanting back. (A) is a front view showing the drive unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the drive unit. (A) is a front view showing a drive base, and (B) is a front view showing a rotating member. (A)-(C) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a drive unit. (A), (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a drive unit similarly. (A) is a front view showing the second effect unit, and (B) is a rear view showing the second effect unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 2nd effect unit from diagonally front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the 2nd production unit from diagonally back. (A) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is at the second standby position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. It is. (A) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is moving toward the second advance position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing each movable base when the movable body is stopped at the second advance position. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing each rendering unit when the movable body is at the second standby position, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing each rendering unit when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. It is. It is a schematic diagram showing each production part when a movable body stops at the 2nd advance position. (A) is a rear view showing the second production section when the movable body is at the second standby position, and (B) is a rear view showing the second production section when the movable body starts moving to the second advance position. It is. (A) is a front view which shows a light-guide plate apparatus, (B) is AA sectional drawing of (A). (A) is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, (B) is a BB sectional view of (A), and (C) is an enlarged view showing a main part of (B). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the movement area | region of each movable body, and a light-guide plate apparatus. (A) is a movable body movement mode determination table, (B) is a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, (C) is a movable body LED light emission mode determination table, and (D) is an illustration showing an effect display device display mode determination table. is there. (A) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of a composite effect pattern 1, and (B) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of a composite effect pattern 2. (A) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of a composite effect pattern 3, and (B) is an explanatory view showing an aspect of a composite effect pattern 4. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state before the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), (C) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state of (A), (D) FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a first movable body and a second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the light guide plate at the start of the light emitting effect in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is the state of (A). FIG. 3D is an explanatory view of the effect display device, and FIG. 4D is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state at the start of operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is FIG. 7A is an explanatory diagram of the effect display device in the state of FIG. 7A, and FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state at the time of completion of the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is FIG. 3D is an explanatory diagram of the effect display device in the state of FIG. 4A, and FIG. 4D is a diagram of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state of a light emitting effect of the movable body LED in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is an explanatory view of the state of (A). FIG. 3D is an explanatory view of the effect display device, and FIG. 4D is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the display effect of the effect display device in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is an illustration of the state of (A). FIG. 3D is an explanatory view of the effect display device, and FIG. 4D is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the light guide plate in the composite effect pattern 3 at the time of the light-emitting effect, and (B) is an explanatory view showing the state of the effect display device in the composite effect pattern 3 at the time of the display effect. (A) (B) is an explanatory view showing a modification of the pattern 2 of the composite effect. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit composition in a main board (game control board). FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure showing a change pattern table in tabular form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a display screen figure of a main effect display device and a sub-effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table and a pre-reading effect type selection table. It is a look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st hold change effect pattern selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd hold change effect pattern selection table and a 3rd hold change effect pattern selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hold change suggestion effect pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pseudo continuous effect type selection table, an active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection determination table, and an active change effect execution execution presence / absence selection determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo continuous color symbol effect pattern selection table. It is an explanatory view showing an active change production type selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st active change effect pattern selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd active change effect pattern selection table and a 3rd active change effect pattern selection table. It is an explanatory view showing an active change suggestion effect pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an action effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution timing of an action effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution timing of an action effect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments (embodiments) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be described as a reference. In addition, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. Pachinko gaming machines (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as gaming machines) 1 are roughly divided into a gaming board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (table) for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. 3). The game board 2 has a game area 10 having a substantially circular shape in a front view and surrounded by a guide rail 2b. In this game area 10, a game ball as a game medium is fired and hit from a hitting ball firing device (not shown). Further, a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a is provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  The game board 2 is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacryl resin in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and an obstacle nail (not shown) and a guide rail 2b are formed on the front face of the game board. And the like, and a spacer member (not shown) integrally attached to the back side of the board. Note that the game board 2 may be constituted by a plywood.

  A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower right position of the game area 10). Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is a special symbol (special identification information) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them in a special figure game as an example of a variable display game. “Toku-zu” is displayed so as to be variable (also referred to as variable display or variable display). Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  The effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special figure display 4A in the special figure game corresponds to the change display of the first special figure and the second special figure display 4B corresponds to the change display of the second special figure. In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R serving as a plurality of variable display units, for example, three, the effect symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified, are variably displayed. The variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A or a special figure using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is used. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols, each of which is identifiable, are changed and displayed, and a fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) as a result of the change display is derived and displayed.

  The effect display device 5 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through an opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. In addition, a frame-shaped center decoration frame 51 is provided in the opening 2 c of the game board 2. Between the rear surface of the game board 2 and the effect display device 5, a first effect unit 300 and a second effect unit 400 described later are provided. In addition, a light guide plate device 500 is provided in front of the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400, and the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 are movable via a light guide plate 501 described later. The body (see FIG. 30) and the display screen of the effect display device 5 can be visually recognized.

  A first hold storage display area 5D and a second hold storage display area 5U are set at two lower left and right portions of the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of change storages corresponding to the special figure game (number of special figure hold storages) can be specified.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. This occurs based on a start winning prize due to (entering). That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of effect symbols is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not established, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is performed. Done.

  Above the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are provided a first reservation display 25A and a second reservation display 25B for displaying the number of reserved special drawings to be specified. Have been. The first reservation display 25A displays the first special figure reserved storage number in a specifiable manner, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second special figure reserved storage number in a specifiable manner.

  Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning prize ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state, which is a vertical position, and an enlarged open state, which is a tilt position, by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. It has a tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second starting winning port as a starting area (second starting area).

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A, and the first special figure. If the number of retained storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on detection of the game balls passing (entering) by the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B. If the number of special figure reservation storages is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 shown in FIG. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area has an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball (or does not easily pass (enter)). To a disadvantaged closed state.

  A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on detection of the game balls that have passed (entered) the large winning opening by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) a game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided above the second hold display 25B. Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area 10, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and effect LEDs 9 are provided around the gaming area 10. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 10 is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area 10, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). Is provided with an upper plate 90 (ball hitting supply plate) which is held (retained) at the same time. A lower plate 91 is provided below the gaming machine frame 3 for holding (reserving) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate 90 so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The tilting operation of the stick controller 31A attached to the member forming the lower plate 91 is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the pressing operation performed on the push button 31B provided on the member forming the upper plate 90 is a push operation. It is detected by the sensor 35B.

  Next, a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, and various types of data transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, as shown in FIG. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying control signals, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a function of setting a random number used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to perform the first special figure and the second special figure. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function. Further, on the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the main substrate 11, detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 for detecting a game ball passing through the passing gate 41 are provided. Wiring for transmission is connected. In addition, display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general picture reservation display 25C, and the like is performed. For transmitting a command signal for connection.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a change pattern designation command indicating a change pattern indicating a change mode such as a change time of the effect symbol, a type of the reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-run.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and provides a ROM 101 (ReadOnlyMemory 101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for game control. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102), a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) for executing a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 104 for updating numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and displays an effect display. Device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, effect LED 9, first effect motor 311L, 311R, second effect motor 425, movable LEDs 307L, 307R, movable LEDs 407A-407D, first position sensor 329, second position sensor Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the light guide plate 432 and the light guide plate LED 502 and various circuits for detecting the operation of the electric components such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are mounted.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 for performing a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 122 for providing a work area of the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation, a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and an I / O 125. And are installed. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for effect is executed. The ROM 121 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the rendering operation in addition to the rendering control program.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ordinary symbol game is started by the ordinary symbol display 20 based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 provided in the gaming area 10. After starting the change of the normal symbol, if the predetermined time that is the normal symbol change time elapses and the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol change display result is `` Normal symbol loss '' Become. When a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variation display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "an ordinary symbol", and enlargement and opening control (tilt control) of the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is performed. Normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position after a lapse of time.

  After the first starting condition is established by, for example, the game ball winning the first starting winning opening, the first starting condition is established by, for example, the end of the last special map game or the big hit game state. Then, the special figure game using the first special symbol display 4A is started. In addition, after the second starting condition is established due to the game ball winning the second starting winning opening or the like, the second starting condition is established due to, for example, the end of the last special map game or the big hit game state. Based on this, the special figure game using the second special symbol display 4B is started.

  In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, a fixed special symbol (special figure display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, the result is "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "miss". After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also called “round game”) advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning prize ball device 7 has a special winning opening door for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of prize balls. During the period until the event occurs, the special winning opening is kept open. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed.

  The special winning opening door, which has the special winning opening opened during the execution of the round, receives game balls falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special winning opening to form a special variable winning prize ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “16”).

  In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5, the variation display of the effect symbols is started in response to the start of the special figure game. Then, during the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display, the variable display state of the effect symbol may reach a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display in which the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 constitute a part of the big hit combination, and the effect symbols that have not been stopped and displayed are still changing. A state or a display state in which all or some of the effect symbols are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a fixed effect symbol that is a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as a “non-probable variable big hit combination”) of a plurality of types of big hit combinations is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation display result is “non-probable variable big hit” ", The state is controlled to the big hit state, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time saving control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving control, a so-called electric chew support, in which the winning frequency of the ordinary symbols is increased and the winning frequency to the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is increased. In the time-saving control, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the special figure game is executed after the end of the big hitting game state, and either of the conditions is satisfied that the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes, it may be ended.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, a confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined probability variable jackpot combination (also referred to as a “variable probability jackpot combination”) among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation display result is “probability variable jackpot”. If it does, it is controlled to the big hit state, and after that, the probability variation control (probable variation control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing the certainty change control, the probability that the change display result is "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than that in the normal state. Probable change control is performed when the change display result becomes “big hit” and the condition of controlling the big hit game state again is satisfied after the end of the big hit game state, and the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 When the special map game is executed, the probability change control is terminated by the probability variable lottery executed every time the special map game is started after the big hit game state is ended. It may end at time, etc.

  When the time-saving control is performed, the control for making the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game (the ordinary figure fluctuation time) shorter than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation display result of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary figure game becomes The control for improving the probability of "hit" than in the normal state, and the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result has become "common figure hit", The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the normal state and control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state, and the second start condition can be satisfied. Controls (electric power support control, high opening control) that are advantageous to the player by increasing the performance are performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is easily satisfied, and the special figure game can be frequently executed. The time until it becomes shorter.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control timer interrupt process is started in the game control main process, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process are executed.

  In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display 4A and the 2 Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation on the special symbol display 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, the special figure display result determination, the big hit type determination, the variation pattern A random number value for determination or the like is extracted, and a start winning process is executed in which the random number value is extracted and stored (stored) at the highest position of an empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit or the second special figure reservation storage unit.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence / absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, Based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determination, a special (decision is made) before the variation display result is derived and displayed, as to whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit". The symbol normal processing is executed. That is, when starting the variation display of the special figure game, the CPU 103 determines whether to derive and display the big hit display result as the display result of the variation display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. The process of determining (lottery) is executed.

  Next, a variation pattern setting process of determining the variation pattern to be one of a plurality of types, a special symbol variation process of performing a setting for varying the special symbol and a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, A special symbol stop process is performed for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol and performing a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) the fixed special symbol. When the fluctuation display result is "big hit", a big hit opening pre-process, a big hit opening process, a big hit opening process, and a big hit ending process for opening and closing the big winning port in the big hit game state are performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, when power is turned on, effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the main process. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main processing, command analysis processing, effect control process processing, effect random number update processing, and volume adjustment processing are executed.

  In the effect control process processing, a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage content of the hold storage buffer. Execute Next, in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag, a change pattern designation command reception waiting process for checking whether or not a change pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 so that the change of the effect symbol is started. The control of the effect symbol variation start process to be controlled, the control of the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) forming the variation pattern according to the process data set in the effect symbol variation start process, and the end of the variation time are monitored. Display control of effect display device 5, sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, effect LED 9, movable LEDs 307L and 307R, movable LEDs 407A to 407D, light emission of light guide plate LED 502, first movable body of first effect unit 300 Drive control of 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 of the second effect unit 400 Demonstration symbol variation during processing, a stop variation in performance symbols displayed results performance symbol variation stop processing for performing control deriving Show (stop symbols) performed to perform like.

  In the big hit display process, after the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. In the big hit game processing, control during the big hit game is performed. In the big hit end effect process, the effect display device 5 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various effects related to the game, such as control of the variation display of the effect symbols and a notice effect, based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Have been.

  In addition, as the announcement effect that the effect control CPU 120 executes during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, for example, a jackpot announcement effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, a reach announcement that suggests whether or not to reach, a stop symbol, and a stop symbol A plurality of notices to be executed at the start of the fluctuation display and at the time of reaching the reach, such as a notice of a stop symbol to be announced, a notice of an announcement of whether or not the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not to be latent), and the like. Including.

  In the present embodiment, a light guide plate effect (light emission effect) by the light guide plate device 500 described below, a display effect by the effect display device 5, a movable object effect in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 operate, Various effects such as a composite effect in which a movable body effect, a light guide plate effect, and a display effect are performed, and an operation effect performed on condition that the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be executed as various notices. I have.

  Next, the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the first effect unit and the second effect unit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 200 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape, and is attached to a position corresponding to the opening 2c on the back surface of the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is attached to the back surface of the base frame 200 so as to close the substantially rectangular opening 201 formed in the base frame 200. Further, a first effect unit 300 is provided on the upper side of the base frame 200, and a second effect unit 400 is provided on the lower side. In the present embodiment, the first effect unit 300 and the second effect unit 400 are provided on one base frame 200, but may be provided on separate base bodies.

  The first effect unit 300 includes a base member 301 attached to the upper side of the base frame 200, a first standby position above the base member 301 (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3), and a first advance position below the base member 301 (see FIG. 3). 3 (a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 3). The second effect unit 400 includes a base body 401 attached to a lower side of the base frame 200, a second standby position below the base body 401 (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 3), and a second advance position above the figure (see FIG. 3). 3 (a position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 3) and a second movable body 402 composed of a first movable portion 402A, a second movable portion 402B, and a third movable portion 402C.

  The first movable bodies 302L and 302R of the first effect unit 300 partially overlap the display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the first standby position, and the whole of the effect display device 5 at the first advance position. Superimposed on the display screen (opening 201). On the other hand, the second movable body 402 partially overlaps the display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the second standby position, and entirely displays the display screen (opening 201) of the effect display device 5 at the second advance position. Superimposed on Further, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second movable body 402 which has moved to the second advance position when moved to the first advance position. In the present embodiment, the first standby position and the second standby position are the respective drive initial positions.

  Next, the first effect unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4A is a front view showing the first effect unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the first effect unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view showing a state of the configuration of the first effect unit viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration of the first effect unit viewed obliquely from behind. 7A is a front view showing the drive unit, and FIG. 7B is a rear view showing the drive unit. 8A is a front view showing a drive base, and FIG. 8B is a front view showing a rotating member. FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams illustrating the operation of the drive unit. FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the drive unit. In FIGS. 4 and 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are indicated by dots for easier understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the base member 301 of the first effect unit 300 includes an upper side portion 301A, a left side portion 301B hanging downward from the left end of the upper side portion 301A, and a right side portion hanging down from the right end of the upper side portion 301A. 301C is formed in a substantially downward U-shape. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided on the front side of the base member 301 so as to be able to move obliquely up and down so as to be separated from each other left and right toward the first advance position, and at the first standby position the front side of the upper side 301A. Placed in At the first standby position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are juxtaposed so that the respective inner oblique sides abut each other. Above the first movable bodies 302L and 302R in the upper side portion 301A, a decorative portion 303 capable of emitting light extends in the left-right direction. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the decoration section 303 are often used, for example, as a title panel section on which the model name (title) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the front surface.

  In addition, a plurality of movable body LEDs 307L, 307R are provided on the front side of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R, and the effects of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R can be enhanced. The movable body LEDs 307L and 307R are not limited to the form provided on the front surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and light is directly emitted forward, and the first body is formed of a cover made of a synthetic resin material having a light-transmitting property. By forming the front surfaces of the movable bodies 302L and 302R and disposing the movable bodies 307L and 307R behind the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the light of the movable bodies 307L and 307R indirectly passes through the cover body. May be emitted.

  The base member 301 is formed of a light-transmitting synthetic resin material, and emits light from light-emitting diodes (LEDs (not shown)) provided on the front surfaces of various substrates 304A, 304B, and 304C provided on the back side. Causes the front surface to emit light.

  Driving units 305L and 305R for driving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided on the back surface of the left side portion 301B and the right side portion 301C of the base member 301. The drive units 305L and 305R are first production motors 311L and 311R that include drive bases 310L and 310R attached to the back surfaces of the left side portion 301B and the right side portion 301C of the base member 301, and a stepping motor attached to the drive bases 310L and 310R. And first to fourth gears 312A to 312D and rotation members 313L and 313R that constitute power transmission means for transmitting the power of the first effect motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R.

  In addition, fixed rails 350L and 350R are attached to the back surface of the left side portion 301B and the right side portion 301C of the base member 301 along respective inner sides, and the first movable body 302L is attached to the fixed rails 350L and 350R. , 302R are slidably provided. Therefore, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are guided to move obliquely up and down by the sliding rails 351L, 351R that slide on the fixed rails 350L, 350R provided in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the rear. Although not shown in detail, the slide rails 351L and 351R are slidably provided on the back surfaces of the fixed rails 350L and 350R, but the front surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are the front surfaces of the base member 301. Located on the side. Lock plates 306L and 306R connected to the rotating members 313L and 313R are attached to the back surfaces of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Next, details of the drive units 305L and 305R will be described. Since the left and right drive units 305L and 305R have substantially the same configuration, the left drive unit 305L will be described below, and the detailed description of the right drive unit 305R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, a first effect motor 311L is attached to the back surface of the drive base 310L. The drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L is inserted through the drive base 310L and protrudes toward the front side. A first gear 312A is fixed to the tip of the drive shaft 311a. Rotation shafts 320B, 320C, 320D facing the front-rear direction are protrudingly provided on the rear surface of the drive base 310L. A second gear 312B meshing with the first gear 312A is rotatably mounted on the rotation shaft 320B. A third gear 312C meshing with the second gear 312B is rotatably supported on the rotating shaft 320C, and a fourth gear 312D meshing with the third gear 312C is rotatable on the rotating shaft 320D. It is pivoted on.

  A connecting piece 321 extends in a direction away from the center of rotation from a predetermined location on the rear peripheral edge of the fourth gear 312D, and a connecting shaft for connecting to the rotating member 313L is provided on the back of the connecting piece 321. 322 protrudes toward the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a guide groove 323 for moving and guiding the lock plate 306L is formed in the drive base 310L. The guide groove 323 includes a guide portion 323A extending obliquely downward and leftward so as to be substantially parallel to the fixed rail 350L, and a restricting portion 323B bent in a hook shape from the upper end of the guide portion 323A to the left. In this guide groove 323, a guided shaft 342 of a lock plate 306L described later is inserted. The connecting portion between the guiding portion 323A and the regulating portion 323B is formed in a curved shape so that the guided shaft 342 can smoothly move between the guiding portion 323A and the regulating portion 323B.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (B), a bearing hole 325 is formed at the left end of the rotating member 313L, and a rotating shaft that projects in the front-rear direction and protrudes from the bearing hole 325 on the back surface of the drive base 310L. With the insertion of 324, the rotating member 313L is pivotally supported on the rotating shaft 324 on the rear side of the drive base 310L. From the vicinity of the bearing hole 325, a first long hole 326 is linearly extended in a direction away from the bearing hole 325, and a connection shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D is provided in the first long hole 326. It is slidably inserted.

  From the vicinity of the left end of the first elongated hole 326, a second elongated hole 327 extends in an arc shape in a direction away from the bearing hole 325. The second elongated hole 327 has a lock plate 306L described later. The guided shaft 342 is slidably inserted. The right end of the second long hole 327 is disposed below the left end of the first long hole 326, and the second long hole 327 is provided to be slightly inclined with respect to the first long hole 326.

  Above the first elongated hole 326, a detection piece 328 that is detected by a first position sensor 329 provided on the back surface of the drive base 310L is formed. In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position, the detection piece 328 is detected by the first position sensor 329.

  The lock plate 306L is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and has guide holes 340A and 340B oriented in the left-right direction at the lower portion side by side. The left and right guide shafts 341A and 341B protruding from the rear surface of the first movable body 302L are inserted into the guide holes 340A and 340B, respectively, whereby the lock plate 306L is connected to the rear drive base 310L and the front surface. The first movable body 302L is provided to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the first movable body 302L.

  In addition, a columnar guided shaft 342 is projected from the rear surface of the lock plate 306L. The guided shaft 342 is inserted through the guide groove 323 of the drive base 310L, and further inserted into the second long hole 327 of the rotating member 313L on the back side.

  When the drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L rotates, the driving unit 305L configured as described above rotates this rotational force from the first gear 312A, the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, and the fourth gear 312D. The first movable body 302L provided with the lock plate 306L is moved between the first standby position and the first advance position by being transmitted to the moving member 313L and further transmitted from the rotating member 313L to the lock plate 306L. Moving. That is, the first gear 312A, the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, the fourth gear 312D, the rotating member 313L, and the lock plate 306L transmit the power of the first effect motor 311L to the first movable body 302L. It constitutes a power transmission mechanism.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, when the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position, the connecting shaft 322 contacts the end of the first elongated hole 326 on the rotation shaft 324 side. By doing so, the rotating member 313L is maintained in a state of being inclined obliquely upward to the left in rear view. On the other hand, the guided shaft 342 is disposed in the regulating portion 323B above the guide groove 323. In this state, the connection shaft 322 abuts on the end of the first elongated hole 326 on the rotation shaft 324 side, so that the rotation of the rotation member 313L counterclockwise in rear view is restricted.

  Specifically, when the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position, the rotating shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D and the rotating shaft 324 of the rotating member 313L are disposed on the left and right, and the connecting shaft 322 is It is arranged on the rotation shaft 324 side from the position immediately above the dynamic shaft 320D and above the rotation shaft 320D and the rotation shaft 324. Then, the connection shaft 322 abuts on the end of the first elongated hole 326 on the rotation shaft 324 side, thereby restricting the clockwise rotation in the rear view, and thereby the counterclockwise rotation of the rotation member 313L in the rear view. Rotation is regulated. In other words, the connection shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D and the first elongated hole 326 of the rotating member 313L allow the rotating member 313L to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front when the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position. Of the first lock mechanism (self-lock mechanism) for regulating the pressure.

  Further, since the guided shaft 342 is disposed in the regulating portion 323B, the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 is regulated, and the first lock mechanism rotates the rotating member 313L clockwise in front view. , The movement of the second elongated hole 327 obliquely downward and leftward is restricted, so that the movement of the guided shaft 342 toward the guide portion 323A is restricted.

  More specifically, the lock plate 306L provided on the first movable body 302L has the guided shaft 342 disposed in the substantially horizontal regulating portion 323B, so that the loads on the lock plate 306L and the first movable body 302L are all reduced. Since it is supported by the lower side of the regulating portion 323B, it is maintained at the upper position of the guide groove 323. Further, since the second elongated hole 327 of the rotating member 313L is disposed so as to vertically intersect with the substantially horizontal regulating portion 323B, the guide shaft 342 moves from the regulating portion 323B to the guide portion 323A. Since the movement is restricted, the guided shaft 342 is prevented from moving from the restriction part 323B to the guide part 323A due to factors such as vibration.

  That is, the restricting portion 323B of the guide groove 323 of the drive base 310L, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the guided shaft 342 act on the guided shaft 342 to move from the restricting portion 323B to the guide portion 323A. Is a second lock mechanism (self-lock mechanism) that regulates the downward movement of the lock plate 306L and the first movable body 302L when the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position. ).

Here, the driving state of the driving unit 305L will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 9 and 10, the rotating member 313L is shown by dots for easy understanding.
First, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the first effecting motor 311L is driven in a state where the first movable body 302L is at the first standby position, the rotational force of the drive shaft 311a is changed to the first gear 312A and the first gear 312A. The power is transmitted to the second gear 312B, the third gear 312C, and the fourth gear 312D.

  Then, when the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D rotates counterclockwise in rear view, the rotating member 313L rotates counterclockwise around the rotating shaft 324 as shown in FIG. 9B. Start rotation. As a result, the second elongated hole 327 moves obliquely downward and to the left as viewed from the rear, so that the guided shaft 342 is moved toward the guide portion 323A. When the connection shaft 322 rotates to a position immediately above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D, the rotation restriction state of the rotation member 313L by the first lock mechanism is released, and the rotation of the rotation member 313L is restricted by the restriction portion 323B of the guided shaft 342. The restriction on the movement of the guide portion 323A is released, and thus the restriction on the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 by the second lock mechanism is released, so that the state of the downward movement of the first movable body 302L is released. .

  When the guided shaft 342 moves only to the left when moving along the regulating portion 323B, the lock plate 306L slides leftward in the rear view with respect to the first movable body 302L, but the first movable body 302L Since it does not substantially fall, the first movable body 302L is prevented from unnaturally finely moving due to the lock and unlock operations.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the connecting shaft 322 moves toward the guide groove 323 from a position immediately above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D, the guided shaft 342 enters the guide portion 323A, The one movable body 302L can move from the first standby position toward the first advance position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the connecting shaft 322 rotates counterclockwise in rear view, the guided shaft 342 is pushed downward by the second elongated hole 327 and moves rightward along the guide groove 323. By moving diagonally downward, the first movable body 302L moves diagonally right downward along the fixed rail 350L.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10B, the rotation of the rotation member 313L is regulated by the connection shaft 322 being located at the lower end of the guide portion 323A, and the first effect motor 311L is turned off. Thus, the first movable body 302L is held at the lower first advance position by its own weight.

  When raising the first movable body 302L from the first advance position to the first standby position, the drive shaft 311a of the first effect motor 311L is driven in a direction opposite to that at the time of lowering. As a result, the rotating member 313L rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 320D, whereby the guided shaft 342 is pushed upward by the second elongated hole 327, and is inclined leftward along the guide groove 323. Move upward. When the guided shaft 342 reaches the upper end of the guide portion 323A and moves to the regulating portion 323B, the downward movement of the guided shaft 342 is regulated by the second lock mechanism, and the connecting shaft 322 is moved to the second position. By abutting the end of the one elongated hole 326 on the rotation shaft 324 side, the rotation of the rotation member 313L counterclockwise in rear view is regulated by the first lock mechanism.

  Further, since the second elongated hole 327 is formed not in a straight line but in an arc shape, for example, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the guided shaft 342 is near the upper portion of the guide portion 323A, The second elongated hole 327 does not become parallel to the guide portion 323A but intersects.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the first standby position and the second standby position different from the first standby position are determined by the first effect motors 311L and 311R that are drive sources. Driving force transmitting means (for example, first to fourth powers) for transmitting the power of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R moving between the standby positions and the first effecting motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. The gears 312A to 312D, the rotating members 313L and 313R), and a first lock mechanism (for example, a fourth gear 312D) that restricts the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R to the second standby position in the first standby position. Shaft 322, the first elongated hole 326 of the rotating member 313L) and a second lock mechanism (for example, the regulating portion 323B of the guide groove 323, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the second lock mechanism). Hole 327), and the driving force transmitting means includes at least rotating members 313L and 313R as specific transmitting members operated by the first effect motors 311L and 311R, and the rotating members 313L and 313R include A part (for example, a first long hole 326 and a second long hole 327) of each of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism is provided.

  By doing so, the movement of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R to the second standby position can be sufficiently restricted by the two lock mechanisms, and one rotating member 313L, 313R can be connected to the two lock mechanisms. Since it can be used for each regulation, the structure can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, the connecting shaft 322 of the fourth gear 312D as the first lock mechanism and the first elongated holes 326 of the rotating members 313L and 313R are provided when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are at the first standby position. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R are configured such that the first movable bodies 302L and 302R define the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, which regulate the rotation of the guide grooves 323 as a second lock mechanism, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the second elongated holes 327. By restricting the lowering of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R when in the standby position, the rotation members 313L, 313R and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are regulated by different lock mechanisms, respectively. The movement of the bodies 302L and 302R can be suitably restricted.

  In this manner, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are not regulated by holding the first movable bodies 302L and 302R by the two lock mechanisms at the first standby position, but the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are directly controlled by one second lock mechanism. And the other first lock mechanism transmits the power of the first effect motors 311L and 311R to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R via the first movable bodies 313L and 313R as specific transmission members. Since the locks 302L and 302R are indirectly held, the load on one lock mechanism can be distributed.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are moved from the first standby position to the first advance position side by the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism when in the first standby position. Although regulated, the load of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R is basically received by the lower side of the regulating portion 323B via the guided shaft 342, and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are supported by the rotating members 313L, 313R. Load is hardly applied. Therefore, the frictional resistance generated between the connecting shaft 322 and the peripheral edge of the first elongated hole 326 when the connecting shaft 322 constituting the first lock mechanism is turned to the restricted state or released is reduced. The load on the first effect motors 311L and 311R for changing the first lock mechanism between the restricted state and the released state can be reduced as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism are different from each other in the configuration and structure of the mechanism for setting the target member in the restricted state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism may have the same structure.

  In addition, the rotating members 313L and 313R are provided with a first elongated hole 326 as a first mechanism part constituting a first lock mechanism, and a second elongated part provided separately from the first mechanism part and constituting a second lock mechanism. By having the second elongated hole 327 as the mechanism, the connection shaft 322 that moves the first elongated hole 326 as the first mechanism and the guided shaft that moves the second elongated hole 327 as the second mechanism. Problems such as breakage due to contact with the shaft 342 can be avoided.

  Further, in a state where the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are at the first standby position, the first effect motors 311L and 311R are driven, and the connection shaft 322 is rotated to a position immediately above the rotation shaft 320D of the fourth gear 312D. Then, the rotation restricting state of the rotation members 313L and 313R by the first lock mechanism is released, and the restriction on the movement of the guided shaft 342 from the restriction portion 323B to the guide portion 323A is released, whereby the second lock mechanism is released. As a result, the downward movement restriction of the guided shaft 342 is released, so that the downward movement restriction state of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R is released. In this way, two locks are provided using the first effect motors 311L and 311R for moving the first movable bodies 302L and 302R without separately providing a drive source for each lock mechanism. Since each mechanism can be regulated and released, the structure can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are at the first standby position, the connecting shaft 322 and the rotating members 313L and 313R of the fourth gear 312D as the first lock mechanism are used. The first long hole 326 is disposed at a position lower than the restricting portion 323B of the guide groove 323 as the second lock mechanism, the guided shaft 342 of the lock plate 306L, and the second long hole 327, so that the first movable hole 326 is formed. The movement of the bodies 302L and 302R can be suitably restricted at the first standby position.

  In addition, the second lock mechanism is provided continuously with the guided shaft 342 provided on the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the guide portion 323A of the guide groove 323 for moving and guiding the guided shaft 342, and the guide portion 323A. A regulating portion 323B that regulates the movement of the guided shaft 342 when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are at the first standby position, and a regulating portion 323A that acts on the guided shaft 342 to guide the guided shaft 342 (restriction release). Position) and a second elongated hole 327 as an operating portion that moves between the regulating portion 323B (regulated position) as a mechanical portion, and the rotating members 313L and 313R have the second elongated hole 327. The second locking mechanism can be changed between the restricted state and the released state by the movement of the guided shaft 342 by the operation of the rotating members 313L and 313R.

  That is, the first lock mechanism rotates the connection shaft 322 by the first effect motors 311L, 311R that move the first movable bodies 302L, 302R, thereby releasing the rotation members 313L, 313R from the rotation restricted state. In contrast to the lock mechanism that changes the state, the second lock mechanism uses the operation (rotation) of the rotation members 313L and 313R released from the restricted state by the first lock mechanism. Since the lock mechanisms change the locked state between 302L and 302R between the restricted state and the released state, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are moved without changing the respective lock mechanisms between the restricted state and the released state by separate driving sources. It is possible to change between the regulated state and the released state by using the power of one driving source to be performed.

  In addition, since a part of the first lock mechanism and a part of the second lock mechanism are formed in one rotating member 313L, 313R, the structure of the drive units 305L, 305R can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Can be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are provided so as to be able to move obliquely up and down between the first standby position and the first advance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction. Further, the first standby position is provided above the first advance position, but may be provided below the first advance position. Furthermore, it does not need to move linearly, and for example, may rotate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R move obliquely up and down by the first to fourth gears 312A to 312D as driving force transmitting means and the rotating members 313L and 313R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driving force transmitting means may be constituted by the above-described rotating gear, a gear mechanism including a rack and a pinion, or the like. An arm mechanism like the members 313L and 313R may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism are configured by the connecting shaft and the long hole. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other structural parts may be used. May be configured.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, of the first to fourth gears 312A to 312D as the driving force transmitting means and the rotating members 313L and 313R, the first locking mechanism and the second locking mechanism are respectively attached to the rotating members 313L and 313R. Although a part is formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and other components such as the first to fourth gears 312A to 312D may include a part of each of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism. May be formed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first elongated holes 326 and the second elongated holes 327 are formed in the rotating members 313L and 313R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating members 313L and 313R are not limited thereto. A connection shaft may be formed in 313R.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are restricted from moving to the first advance position by the two lock mechanisms (the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism) at the first standby position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement to the first advance position may be restricted by three or more lock mechanisms. Further, two or more components constituting at least one of the first lock mechanism and the second lock mechanism may be formed on the rotating members 313L and 313R.

  Next, the second effect unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11A is a front view showing the second effect unit, and FIG. 11B is a rear view showing the second effect unit. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the second effect unit as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the second effect unit as viewed obliquely from behind. 14A is a schematic diagram illustrating each movable base when the movable body is at the second standby position, and FIG. 14B is a schematic view illustrating each movable base when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. FIG. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram illustrating each movable base when the movable body is moving toward the second advance position, and FIG. 15B is each schematic diagram illustrating each movable base when the movable body is stopped at the second advance position. It is the schematic which shows a base. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram showing each effect part when the movable body is at the second standby position, and FIG. 16B is each effect part when the movable body starts moving toward the second advance position. FIG. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing each rendering unit when the movable body stops at the second advance position. FIG. 18A is a rear view illustrating the second rendering unit when the movable body is at the second standby position, and FIG. 18B is a second rendering unit when the movable body starts moving to the second advance position. FIG. In FIGS. 11, 12, 16, and 17, the second movable body 402 is indicated by dots for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the base body 401 of the second effect unit 400 includes a base member 401A that movably supports the second movable body 402, and a decorative member 401B that is attached to the front side of the base member 401A. And a mounting member 401C mounted on the back side of the base member 401A and mounted on the lower side of the base frame 200. The base member 401A, the decorative member 401B, and the mounting member 401C are arranged separately from each other.

  The second movable body 402 provided movably with respect to the base body 401 includes a first movable portion 402A rotatably disposed between the base member 401A and the mounting member 401C, and the base member 401A and the mounting member 401C. And a third movable portion 402C rotatably disposed between the base member 401A and the decorative member 401B. ing.

  The first movable part 402A includes a first movable base 410A, a first effect part 411A attached to the front side of the first movable base 410A and covering the first movable base 410A, and a front side of the first effect part 411A. And a plurality of movable LEDs 407 </ b> A provided in the main body. The second movable part 402B is provided for the second movable base 410B, the second effect part 411B attached to the front side of the second movable base 410B and covering the second movable base 410B, and the second effect part 411B. It comprises a second effect part 411D rotatably provided, a plurality of movable body LEDs 407B provided on the front side of the second effect part 411B, and a movable body LED 407D provided on the front side of the second effect part 411D. Have been. The third movable part 402C includes a third movable base 410C, a third effect part 411C attached to the front side of the third movable base 410C and covering the third movable base 410C, and a front side of the third effect part 411C. And a plurality of movable LEDs 407 </ b> C provided in the main body.

  The movable body LEDs 407A to 407D are not limited to the form provided on the front surface of each of the effect parts 411A to 411D and light is directly emitted to the front, and each of the effect parts 411A to 411D is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency. By forming and arranging the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D behind the respective rendering units 411A to 411D, the light of the movable body LEDs 407A to 407D is indirectly emitted forward through the rendering units 411A to 411D. It may be.

  The first movable base 410A of the first movable portion 402A has a bearing hole 421 formed at the right end thereof into which a rotating shaft 420 protruding from the rear right side of the base member 401A is inserted, and is inserted into the bearing hole 421. The pivotal support is rotatable between a horizontal position facing the left and right direction (see FIG. 14A) and an inclined position inclined obliquely upward and leftward (see FIG. Have been. A bearing cover 422 attached to the base member 401A is provided on the back side of the bearing hole 421 in the first movable base 410A, and deviation from the rotating shaft 420 is regulated. Further, between the first movable base 410A and the bearing cover 422, a torsion spring 423 having one end locked to the first movable base 410A and the other end locked to the bearing cover 422 is provided. The first movable base 410A is constantly biased by the torsion spring 423 to rotate in the direction of the inclined position.

  A second effect motor 425 is mounted on the right front side of the base member 401A. The drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 is inserted through the base member 401A and protrudes rearward, and a first gear 426 is fixed to a tip of the protruded drive shaft 425a. The first gear 426 is meshed with a second gear 427 that is rotatable about a rotation shaft 430 protruding from the rear side of the base member 401A.

  A connecting piece 428 extends in a direction away from the center of rotation from a predetermined position on the rear peripheral edge of the second gear 427, and a connection for connecting to the first movable base 410A is provided on the back surface of the connecting piece 428. A shaft 429 protrudes rearward. The connecting shaft 429 is slidably inserted into a long hole 424 formed on the right side of the bearing hole 421 in the first movable base 410A. Therefore, the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 rotates, and the connection shaft 429 of the connection piece 428 rotates through the first gear 426 and the second gear 427, whereby the first movable base 410A rotates. It rotates around a shaft 420.

  At the left end of the first movable base 410A, a connecting shaft 431 for transmitting power to the second movable base 410B is protruded forward. In addition, a second position sensor 432 is provided near the rotation shaft 420 on the back surface of the base member 401A, and detects a detection unit (not shown) provided at a predetermined position of the first movable base 410A. In the present embodiment, a detection unit (not shown) is detected by the second position sensor 432 when the first movable unit 402A is at the second standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in particular, the second movable base 410B has an arc-shaped connecting groove 440 that is inclined slightly downward from left to right and extends in the left-right direction. The connection shaft 431 of the first movable base 410A is slidably inserted into 440. A connecting shaft 441 for transmitting power to the third movable base 410C is provided at a position below the right end of the connecting groove 440 so as to project forward.

  A guide portion 445 for connecting to the base member 401A is provided below the connection groove 440 in the second movable base 410B. More specifically, a fixed rail 442 facing up and down is fixed to the front surface of the base member 401A, and sliding rails 443A and 443B are attached to the fixed rail 442 so as to be slidable in the up and down direction. On the right side of the sliding rail 443A, a guide bar 444 that faces in the up-down direction is provided side by side, and the guide portion 445 is fitted to the guide bar 444 so as to be slidable in the up-down direction.

  In other words, the second movable base 410B moves the sliding rails 443A and 443B vertically with respect to the fixed rail 442 and moves the guide portion 445 vertically with respect to the guide rod 444, so that the rear surface of the decorative member 401B is moved. Between the lower position (see FIG. 14 (A)) and the upper position (see FIG. 15 (B)) above the lower position so that the base member 401A moves vertically. Has become.

  The third movable base 410C has, at its left end, a bearing hole 451 into which a rotating shaft 450 protruding from the front left side of the base member 401A is inserted, and a rotating shaft 450 inserted into the bearing hole 451. As a center, it is rotatably supported between a horizontal position facing left and right (see FIG. 14A) and an inclined position inclined obliquely upward and rightward (see FIG. 15B). A guide piece 452 extends from the left end of the third movable base 410C in a direction away from the center of rotation, and a guide shaft 453 protrudes from the back surface of the guide piece 452. The guide shaft 453 is slidably inserted into an arc-shaped guide groove 454 about the rotation shaft 450 in the base member 401A, thereby defining a rotation range of the third movable base 410C.

  The third movable base 410C has an arc-shaped connecting groove 455 inclined downward from the right end toward the center, and the connecting groove 455 has a connecting shaft 441 of the second movable base 410B. Are slidably inserted.

  As described above, the connection shaft 431 of the first movable base 410A is slidably inserted into the connection groove 440 of the second movable base 410B, so that the first movable base 410A and the second movable base 410B are connected to each other. The connection shaft 441 of the second movable base 410B is slidably inserted into the connection groove 455 of the third movable base 410C, so that the second movable base 410B and the third movable base 410C are connected. That is, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C are connected via the second movable base 410B.

  Next, an operation mode of the first movable base 410A, the second movable base 410B, and the third movable base 410C constituting the second movable body 402 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the second movable body 402 is at the second standby position, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C are at the horizontal position, and the second movable base 410B is at the lower position. is there. Specifically, the rotation axis 420 of the first movable base 410A and the rotation axis 450 of the third movable base 410C are disposed to be separated from each other in the left and right directions, and one of the first movable base 410A and the third movable base 410C is disposed. Is disposed so as to incline toward the other rotating shaft. At this time, the connection shaft 431 is disposed at the left end of the connection groove 440, and the connection shaft 441 is disposed at the left end of the connection groove 455. Further, the guide portion 445 is disposed below the guide bar 444, and the slide rails 443A and 443B are also disposed on the front surface of the fixed rail 442.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 14 (B), the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 rotates, and the connection shaft 429 of the connection piece 428 passes through the first gear 426 and the second gear 427 so as to be viewed from the front. By turning around, the first movable base 410A turns around the turning shaft 420 clockwise in front view. Then, as the connection shaft 431 moves upward in response to the rotation of the first movable base 410A, the connection shaft 431 slides to the right while pushing up the connection groove 440, so that the second movable base 410B rises. The second movable base 410B moves substantially vertically upward as the guide portion 445 is moved and guided by the guide rod 444.

  Then, as the connection shaft 441 moves upward in response to the rise of the second movable base 410B, the connection shaft 441 slides upward while pushing up the connection groove 455, so that the third movable base 410C is counterclockwise viewed from the front. Rotate around. That is, the second movable base 410B and the third movable base 410C are linked in accordance with the rotation of the first movable base 410A.

  Next, when the guide portion 445 reaches the upper end of the guide rod 444, the sliding rails 443A and 443B slide upward with respect to the fixed rail 442 as shown in FIG. To move upward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the connecting shaft 431 reaches the right end of the connecting groove 440 and the connecting shaft 441 reaches the upper end of the connecting groove 455, the first movable base 410A and the third movable base The base 410C is arranged at an inclined position, and the second movable base 410B is arranged at an upper position. In the state where the second movable body 402 has moved to the second advance position in this manner, the distal end of the first movable base 410A and the distal end of the third movable base 410C are arranged close to each other to form a substantially inverted V-shape in a front view. Is done.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 15B, in a state where the second movable body 402 is at the second advance position, the drive shaft 425a of the second effect motor 425 is reversely rotated, so that the first movable base 410A is in front. The third movable base 410C pivots counterclockwise as viewed, and the second movable base 410B descends in response thereto, whereby the third movable base 410C pivots clockwise as viewed from the front. And the 1st movable base 410A and the 3rd movable base 410C are arrange | positioned at a horizontal position, and the 2nd movable body 402 is arrange | positioned at a 2nd standby position by arrange | positioning the 2nd movable base 410B at a lower position.

  Next, the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B and 411D, and the third effect unit 411C will be described.

  The first production section 411A, the second production sections 411B, 411D, and the third production section 411C are each made of a non-light-transmissive production member having a decoration or the like on its front surface, and extend from the second standby position to the second advance position. Are moved separately from each other, and when they move to the second advance position, they are combined to form a predetermined form (for example, see FIG. 17). As described above, the first rendering unit 411A, the second rendering units 411B and 411D, and the third rendering unit 411C that constitute the second movable body 402 are portions that are noticed by the player, and these first rendering units 411A are provided. A moving mechanism for moving the second effect units 411B and 411D and the third effect unit 411C between the second standby position and the second advance position different from the second standby position is required.

  The moving mechanism unit is a mechanism unit necessary for operating the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C in a predetermined mode. For example, the first effect unit 411A, It includes a first movable base 410A, a second movable base 410B, and a third movable base 410C that operably support the second effect parts 411B, 411D and the third effect part 411C. More specifically, a connection shaft 431 formed in the first movable base 410A, a connection groove 440 and a connection shaft 441 formed in the second movable base 410B, a connection groove 455 formed in the third movable base 410C, and the like. A connecting portion for connecting the movable bases, a power transmitting portion (for example, a gear portion) for transmitting the power of the second effect motor 425 to other members, and the like are included.

  These moving mechanism units are formed to operate the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C in a predetermined mode, and include the first effect unit 411A and the second effect. The parts 411B and 411D and the third effect part 411C have a poor appearance. Therefore, the first production section 411A, the second production sections 411B, 411D, and the third production section 411A, the second production sections 411B, 411D, and the third production section 411B, 411D and 411C are not damaged. The part 411C covers the front surfaces of the first movable base 410A, the second movable base 410B, and the third movable base 410C.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 12, the second directing units 411B and 411D cover the substantially right portion on the front surface of the second movable base 410B, but the left mechanical portion E (FIG. 11). (A), see white area in FIG. 17) is not covered. That is, the mechanical part E is a mechanical part necessary for operating the first effect part 411A, the second effect parts 411B, 411D and the third effect part 411C, but the first effect part at the second advance position. When 411A, the second effect parts 411B and 411D, and the third effect part 411C are in a predetermined form, they are unnecessary parts.

  FIGS. 16 (A), 16 (B) and 17 show the first effect part 411A, the second effect parts 411B, 411D and the third effect when the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position. An operation mode of the rendering unit 411C is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (A), when the second movable body 402 is at the second standby position, the first effect unit 411A, the second effect units 411B, 411D, and the third effect unit 411C decorate the base body 401. The front side is covered with a member 401B (a portion indicated by oblique lines in the drawing) and the like, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the front side. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the second movable body 402 starts moving from the second standby position to the second advance position, each of the first effect parts 411A, the second effect parts 411B and 411D, and the third effect. The portion of the part 411C that has moved above the base body 401 becomes visible to the player.

  Here, the second effect unit 411D will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 18 (A), the second rendering unit 411D is rotatable between a tilted position and a standing position via a rotating shaft 460 facing the front-rear direction on the front side of the second rendering unit 411B. It is pivoted on. A rotating member 461 that rotates around a rotating shaft 460 is integrally fixed to the back surface of the second effect portion 411D, and a connecting shaft 462 is provided to protrude from the periphery of the rotating member 461. I have.

  On the other hand, a slide plate 463 is provided in the second effect portion 411B so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is inserted into a connection long hole 464 formed at the upper end of the slide plate 463. The slide plate 463 is constantly urged downward by a torsion spring 465 mounted around the rotation shaft 460, and when the second movable body 402 is located at the second standby position, FIG. As shown in (A), the lower end is arranged at an upper position by abutting on a predetermined portion of the base member 401A. When the second movable body 402 moves upward from the second standby position to the second advance position, as shown in FIG. 18B, the lower end is separated from a predetermined portion of the base member 401A, so that the torsion spring 465 is provided. And is moved downward to the lower position.

  As a result, the connecting shaft 462 rotates downward, so that the second rendering unit 411D tilts immediately after the second movable body 402 starts moving from the second standby position to the second advance position. Move from the position to the standing position (see FIG. 16B). Although not particularly shown, when the second movable body 402 moves from the second advance position to the second standby position, the lower end of the slide plate 463 comes into contact with a predetermined portion of the base member 401A and resists the urging force of the torsion spring 465. Then, the second effect part 411D moves from the standing position to the tilting position just before the second movable body 402 returns to the second standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the second movable body 402 starts moving from the second standby position to the second advance position, and the second movable base 410B rises, the mechanical part E in the second movable base 410B. Becomes visible to the player. Then, as shown in FIG. 17, even when the second movable body 402 stops at the second advance position, the mechanical portion E of the second movable base 410B can be visually recognized by the player.

  As described above, when the first effect portion 411A, the second effect portions 411B, 411D, and the third effect portion 411C attain the predetermined form shown in FIG. 17 at the second advance position, the mechanical portion E of the second movable base 410B becomes Since it is an unnecessary part, the second effect part 411B cannot be expanded to cover the mechanism part E. However, in the present embodiment, when the second movable body 402 is moving from the second standby position to the second advance position as shown in FIG. 16B, or as shown in FIG. When the body 402 is stopped at the second advance position, the mechanical portion E of the second movable base 410B becomes visible to the player. That is, the mechanism portion E is a viewable portion that can be viewed by the player when the second movable body 402 is moving from the second standby position to the second advance position or when the second movable body 402 is stopped at the second advance position. It has been.

  As described above, when the second movable body 402 is moving from the second standby position to the second advance position or is stopped at the second advance position, the mechanical portion E of the second movable base 410B is connected to the player. In this embodiment, as described below, the second movable base is formed by using the first movable bodies 302L and 302R of the light guide plate device 500 and the first effect unit 300, since the appearance is impaired when the first movable body 302R becomes visible from the outside. The mechanism portion E of 410B is made difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Next, the light guide plate device 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A is a front view showing the light guide plate device, and FIG. 19B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 20A is an enlarged front view showing a main part of the light guide plate device, FIG. 20B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 20A, and FIG. 20C is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. . FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the moving area of each movable body and the light guide plate device. Here, to facilitate understanding, a light-emitting region 506 described later is indicated by a dot (halftone dot), and a non-light-emitting region 507 having no dot (halftone dot) is indicated by white.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the light guide plate device 500 includes a light guide plate 501 provided so as to close the opening 2 c of the game board 2, and a light guide for making light incident on the right end face 501 a of the light guide plate 501. An LED substrate 503 on which a plurality of light plate LEDs 502 are mounted, a condenser lens 504 for condensing light from the light guide plate LED 502 toward a right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate 501 and the LED substrate 503 integrated. And a frame member 505. The light guide plate device 500 may be fixed to the back of the game board 2 or may be fixed to the center decorative frame 51.

  The light guide plate 501 is a plate member formed of a material such as a transparent synthetic resin such as acrylic or polycarbonate having a predetermined front-rear width dimension (plate thickness = about 5 mm), as shown in FIG. , The effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402.

  In addition, the light guide plate 501 is a light emitting region 506 as a first region that forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits the light from the front surface. A light emitting region (see a halftone dot region in FIGS. 19A and 20A) that emits light from the right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501, and a light emitted from the right end face 501a. A non-light-emitting area 507 as a second area not forming a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 forward and emits the light from the front, that is, a non-light-emitting area that does not emit light due to light incident inside the light guide plate 501. A light-emitting region (see a white region in FIGS. 19A and 20A).

  The light emitting region 506 is formed such that a radial figure appears at a substantially central position of the light guide plate 501. When light enters the inside of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting region 506 reflects the light and emits the light forward. Thus, a predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by light emission.

  The non-light-emitting region 507 includes a circular non-light-emitting portion 507A provided at the center of the light-emitting region 506 and a plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507A provided on the left and right of the non-light-emitting portion 507A in the light-emitting region 506 and having a smaller diameter than the non-light-emitting portion 507A. A light-emitting portion 507B, a non-light-emitting portion 507C provided above the non-light-emitting portion 507A in the light-emitting region 506 and having a smaller diameter than the non-light-emitting portion 507A, and obliquely downward to the right of the non-light-emitting portion 507A in the light-emitting region 506. A plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507D arranged to form a circle with a smaller diameter than the non-light-emitting portion 507A, and a plurality of circles smaller than the non-light-emitting portion 507A arranged diagonally to the left of the non-light-emitting portion 507A in the light-emitting region 506. And a plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507F provided on the outer edge of the light guide plate 501 (outside the light-emitting region 506). Light inside the plate 501 is an area no to be light emitting display even when the incident. In particular, the non-light-emitting portions 507A to 507E are regions whose periphery is surrounded by the light-emitting region 506.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, the light emitting region 506 is in a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a and emit the light from the front. It is formed on the back side. Specifically, the light-emitting region 506 is formed in a concavo-convex state (rough surface) having a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side. In FIG. 20C, an uneven state (rough surface) is illustrated in an enlarged manner to facilitate understanding. However, the actual light emitting region 506 has fine irregularities of a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye. It is in a state.

  When light enters the inside from the right end face 501a of the light guide plate 501, a predetermined image (still image) is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of concave portions 510 formed in the light emitting region 506 (FIG. 19 (A)). That is, the light emitting region 506 as a first region for forming a predetermined light guide pattern for reflecting the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered the inside from the right end surface 501a forward and emitting the light from the front surface is formed by the plurality of recesses 510. Is formed as a second area where a predetermined light guide pattern is not formed, in which the light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered inside from the right end face 501a is reflected forward and emitted from the front. The light emitting area 507 is an area where a dot pattern composed of the plurality of recesses 510 is not formed. Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined image (figure) is exemplified as the display information that can be displayed by the light guide plate 501, but in addition to this, decoration such as a picture, a character, a symbol, a pattern, or a pattern is also provided. Other display information may be displayed.

  When the light guide plate 501 does not receive light from the right end face 501a, the entire light guide plate 501 including the light-emitting region 506 is in a colorless and transparent state, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, The movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be viewed (see through) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, when light is incident from the right end face 501a, the light emitting region 506 emits light, but the portion other than the light emitting region 506 remains colorless and transparent.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting region 506 is formed in an uneven state having a substantially semicircular shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the light emitting region 506 may be formed by a light guide plate by a stamper or injection. A configuration may be adopted in which a concave / convex portion is provided on the back surface (rear surface) of 501. In addition, the reflection portion is formed by a silk printing method in which reflective dots are printed on an acrylic plate with white ink, a sticking dot method in which an acrylic plate and a reflective plate are attached with a dot-shaped adhesive, a groove processing method, or the like. May be.

  In the present embodiment, the shape of each of the projections and depressions of the light emitting region 506 on the back surface (rear surface) of the light guide plate 501 is substantially semicircular in cross section, but the present invention is not limited to this. The light emitting region 506 can be variously modified as long as the light emitting region 506 has a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light toward the front (front surface) such as a substantially triangular cross section.

  The condensing lens 504 is formed in a long plate shape extending in the vertical direction by a translucent member such as acrylic or polycarbonate. On the surface of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side, a plurality of semicircular protrusions 504A swelling toward the light guide plate 501 in a front view are formed continuously in the vertical direction. The condenser lens 504 is constituted by a single member in which a plurality of convex portions 504A are provided integrally. Each convex portion 504A is formed one by one corresponding to each of the light guide plate LEDs 502.

  In addition, the protrusion 504A is not limited to one-to-one correspondence with the light guide plate LED 502, and for example, one protrusion 504A may correspond to two or more light guide plate LEDs 502. Further, the condensing lens 504 is not limited to a single member in which the plurality of convex portions 504A are provided integrally, but may include a plurality of condensing lenses separately formed corresponding to the light guide plate LED 502. May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is smaller than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side. In addition, since the front-back width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate 501 side is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the light receiving surface of the light guide plate 501, light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is diffused in the front-rear direction. The light is incident on the light guide plate 501 without any light leakage.

  The front surface of the condenser lens 504 is a flat inclined surface that is gradually inclined rearward from the light guide plate LED 502 side toward the light guide plate 501 side, and the rear surface of the condenser lens 504 is the light guide plate from the light guide plate LED 502 side. It is a flat inclined surface that is gradually inclined toward the front side toward the 501 side. That is, the condenser lens 504 is formed in a tapered shape in which the plate thickness gradually decreases from the light guide plate LED 502 side to the light guide plate 501 side.

  Further, a slight gap is provided between the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501. For example, the interval of the gap is so large that the condensing lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 do not come into contact with each other even when vibration occurs during transportation or use of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thus, it is possible to prevent the condenser lens 504 and the light guide plate 501 from being damaged by vibration generated during transportation and use of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, a light guide state of light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 will be described. The light emitted from each light guide plate LED 502 enters the condenser lens 504. Here, since the entrance surface of the condenser lens 504 is formed in a curved shape so as to form a lens surface, even if the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light enters the condenser lens 504. Is diffused radially in the left and right direction in the condenser lens 504. Then, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 is refracted rightward and emitted when passing through the inner curved lens surface.

  Thereby, even when the directivity of the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 is high, the light emitted from the light guide plate LED 502 can be diffused to some extent radially by the condenser lens 504, and the light emitting area in the light guide plate 501 can be diffused. Can be expanded. Further, since the light emitted from the condenser lens 504 is guided in the horizontal direction (since it is suppressed from spreading radially), only the portion corresponding to each light guide plate LED 502 can emit light.

  Also, the light incident on the condenser lens 504 from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed toward a substantially central position in the front-rear direction while repeating total reflection in the front-rear direction. The light is emitted from the end face on the 501 side (the portion where the front-rear width is smallest).

  With such a configuration, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be collected and guided to the light guide plate 501 without being diffused in the front-rear direction. In particular, even when the front-rear width of the light emitting surface of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front-rear width of the condenser lens 504 on the light guide plate LED 502 side, light from the light guide plate LED 502 is not diffused in the front-rear direction. Since the light can be guided to the light guide 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be prevented from being diffused to the surroundings.

  Although not specifically shown, for example, even when a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 502 are arranged in the front-rear direction, the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502 of the condenser lens 504 is increased according to the front-rear width of the light guide plate LED 502. Accordingly, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 can be made incident on the condenser lens 504 without diffusing in the front-back direction. Therefore, even when the front and rear width of the light emitting region of the light guide plate LED 502 is larger than the front and rear width of the light guide plate 501, the light from the light guide plate LED 502 is condensed without diffusing in the front and rear direction and is condensed on the light guide plate 501. I can guide you.

  When the light from the condenser lens 504 is guided into the light guide plate 501 and reaches the light emitting area 506, the light is reflected toward the front side (the player side) in the light emitting area 506. As a result, when viewed from the player, the light-emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by reflected light, so that a figure represented by a halftone dot in FIG. 19A is displayed on the front surface of the light guide plate 501. Become like The light guide plate 501 may be configured to display an image such as a predetermined character or figure on the light guide plate 501 by emitting light from the portion corresponding to the light emitting region 506 by the reflected light.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when viewed from the player (in the front-rear direction), the effect display device 5 is arranged at the back, and the light guide plate device 500 is arranged at the front. When viewed from the player, the effect display device 5 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. For example, the effect display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal panel. For example, as a liquid crystal panel, a twisted nematic mode (TN mode), an in-plane switching mode (IPS mode), a vertical alignment mode (VA mode), a ferroelectric liquid crystal mode, an antiferroelectric liquid crystal mode, a homogeneous liquid crystal mode, Liquid crystal panels of various modes such as a guest-host liquid crystal mode, a polymer dispersed liquid crystal mode, and a holographic polymer dispersed liquid crystal mode may be used. Note that the effect display device 5 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may use an EL display device such as an organic EL display device or an inorganic EL display device.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the light emitting area 506 includes a moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501, a moving area E2 of the second movable body 402, and the The display area is formed so as to be superimposed on the front and rear with respect to most of the display area. The moving regions E1 and E2 are hatched regions surrounded by a chain line in FIG.

  Specifically, the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R is an area until the first movable bodies 302L and 302R move from the first standby position to the first advance position, and the moving area of the second movable body 402. E2 is an area until the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position, and is an area including the first standby position and the first advance position, and the second standby position and the second advance position. is there. When light is incident from the right end face 501a, the light guide plate 501 is in a state in which the light emitting region 506 emits light, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402 are displayed. From the front of the light guide plate 501, it is difficult or impossible to see (see through) from the front. That is, when the light emitting region 506 emits light, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are visible from the front of the light guide plate 501 regardless of whether the movable operation is being performed or the operation is completed. (See through) Difficult or invisible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are located at the first advance position, the plurality of movable bodies LEDs 307L, 307R of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are connected to the light guide plate 501. On the back surface, it is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of non-light-emitting portions 507B in the non-light-emitting region 507. Also, when the second movable body 402 is located at the second advance position, the plurality of movable body LEDs 407A of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are located on the back surface of the light guide plate 501 and the plurality of non-light emitting areas 507 The movable LED 407B is disposed at a position corresponding to the non-light emitting unit 507A, and the plurality of movable LEDs 407C are disposed at a position corresponding to the non-light emitting unit 507E. The body LED 407D is arranged at a position corresponding to the non-light emitting portion 507C. That is, when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R are located at the first advance position and the second movable body 402 is located at the second advance position, the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are connected to the non-light-emitting portions 507A to 507D. It becomes visible from the front through 507E (see FIGS. 28 and 29).

  Note that the display image of the effect display device 5 is arranged so as to partially overlap behind the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402.

  Next, the composite effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 (A) is a table for determining a movable body movement mode, FIG. 22 (B) is a table for determining a light guide plate light emitting mode, FIG. 22 (C) is a table for determining a movable body LED light mode, and FIG. FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of the composite effect pattern 1, and FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing an aspect of the composite effect pattern 2. 24A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an aspect of a composite effect pattern 3, and FIG. 24B is an explanatory view illustrating an aspect of a composite effect pattern 4. 25A is an explanatory view showing a state before the composite effect, (B) is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of (A), and (C) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state of (A). (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of (A). 26A is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the light guide plate in the composite effect pattern 1 at the start of the light emission effect, FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state, and (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state (A). 27A is an explanatory view showing a state at the start of the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in Pattern 1 of the composite effect, FIG. 27B is an explanatory view of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. (C) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state of (A), and (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of (A). 28A is an explanatory diagram showing a state at the time of completion of the operation of the first movable body and the second movable body in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. (C) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state of (A), and (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of (A). 29A is an explanatory diagram showing a state of a light emitting effect of the movable body LED in the pattern 1 of the composite effect, FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. 29A, and FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state of (A), and (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state of (A). 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a state of a display effect of the effect display device in pattern 1 of the composite effect, FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram of the light guide plate in the state of FIG. 30A, and FIG. (D) is an explanatory view of the effect display device in the state, and (D) is an explanatory view of the first movable body and the second movable body in the state (A). FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the light guide plate in the composite effect pattern 3 at the time of light emission effect, and FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing a state of the composite effect pattern 3 at the time of display effect of the effect display device. It is. FIGS. 32A and 32B are explanatory diagrams showing modified examples of the pattern 2 of the composite effect. 26 to 32, in order to facilitate understanding, in the central portion of the game board 2, bright portions as viewed from the player are shown in white, and dark portions as viewed from the player are shown as dots (halftone dots). Show.

  In the present embodiment, an example of an effect performed by the effect control CPU 120 when the fluctuation pattern specified from the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. The effect here means the operation effect of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate effect (light emission effect) by the light guide plate device 500, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R, and the second movable body 402. Is a combined effect including an effect by each movable body LED provided on the display device, and a display effect by the effect display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the composite effect based on the reception of the change pattern designation command (super-reach change pattern) from the game control microcomputer 100, and performs the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second An effect mode such as an operation effect of the movable body 402, a light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device 500, an effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D, and a display effect by the effect display device 5 is determined. Start the variable display of the effect symbols. In this embodiment, the execution of the composite effect is performed at a rate of 100% regardless of whether the variation pattern designating command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern per super reach or a variation pattern out of super reach. Although the determination is made, the presence or absence of execution may be determined.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 included in the effect control board 12 includes, for example, a movable body movement mode determination table shown in FIG. 22A, a light guide plate light emission mode determination table shown in FIG. 22B, and FIG. A moving body LED light emission mode determination table shown in FIG. 22, an effect display device display mode determination table shown in FIG.

  The movable body movement mode determination table is a table that determines the movement mode of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 in the composite effect.

  Specifically, the movable body movement mode determination table stops at the first standby position and the second standby position without moving the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to the first advance position and the second advance position. There is a stop pattern that keeps the state as it is, and a movement pattern that moves the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to the first advance position and the second advance position. When the stop pattern is determined, even when the movement start timing of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 in the movement pattern is reached, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body An image in which the first movable body 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first advance position and the second advance position by the effect display device 5 while the 402 is stopped at the first standby position and the second standby position. An effect of displaying only P is performed (see FIG. 31B).

  Note that the movable body movement mode determination table of the present embodiment describes an example in which only the stop pattern and the movement pattern have a movement mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movement modes are provided. Is also good. For example, a first movement pattern for moving the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to a first advance position and a second advance position, and a first movable body 302L, 302R and a second movable body 402 are defined as a first movable pattern. , A second movement pattern for moving to a position between the second standby position and the first and second advance positions.

  The stop pattern and the movement pattern are determined according to the display result (outlier, non-probable variable hit, probable variable hit) of the variable display specified by the variable pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 in the movable body moving mode determination table. The determined ratio is different.

  Specifically, in the case of a miss, the stop pattern is determined as the movement mode at a rate of 80%, and the movement pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a non-probable jackpot, the stop pattern is determined as a movement mode at a rate of 20%, and the movement pattern is determined at a rate of 80%. In the case of a probable jackpot, the stop pattern is determined at a rate of 10%. The moving mode is determined, and the moving pattern is determined at a rate of 90%. That is, in the case of a miss, the stop pattern is determined at a higher rate than the movement pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the movement pattern is determined at a higher rate than the stop pattern. In other words, in the movable body movement mode, the expectation of the big hit is higher in the movement pattern than in the stop pattern. In the case of a non-probable variable hit, the stop pattern is determined at a higher rate than the moving pattern. In the case of the positive change, the move pattern is determined at a higher rate than the stop pattern. In other words, the moving pattern has a higher degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot than the stop pattern.

  Subsequently, the light guide plate light emission mode determination table will be described. The light guide plate light emission mode determination table is a table for determining the light emission mode of the light guide plate device 500 in the composite effect.

  More specifically, the light guide plate light emission mode determination table has a white pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to emit white light, a red pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to emit red light, and a flash pattern that causes the light guide plate 501 to blink and emit light. As described later, this light guide plate light emission mode is used for a period from before the movement of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 (before the start of the movement pattern in the movable body movement aspect determination table) to after the movement is completed. (See FIGS. 23A and 23B). When the stop pattern is determined in the movable body moving mode determination table, the stop pattern is performed for a predetermined period after the effect display device 5 displays the images of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (see FIG. )reference).

  Note that the light guide plate light emission mode determination table of the present embodiment describes an example having a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this. I just need. For example, the light emission mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like. Further, the flash pattern according to the present embodiment is described as a mode in which the light guide plate 501 blinks and emits light in red, but is not limited thereto, and the light guide plate 501 may emit light in another color.

  These white pattern, red pattern, and flash pattern are the display results of the fluctuation display specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table (outlier, non-probable variable hit, probable variable hit). The ratio determined according to is different.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss, a white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 80%, a red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and a flash pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. In the case of a non-probable variable hit, a white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 20%, a red pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and a flash pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, in the case of the probability change jackpot, the white pattern is determined as the light emission mode at a rate of 2%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of a loss, the white pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern and the flash pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the red pattern and the flash pattern are determined at a higher rate than the white pattern. . In other words, in the light emission mode, the red pattern and the flash pattern have a higher expectation of a big hit than the white pattern.

  Also, in the case of a non-probable variable hit, the red pattern is determined at a higher rate than the flash pattern, and for the probable variable hit, the flash pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern. In other words, the flash pattern has a higher degree of expectation of the probability change hit than the red pattern.

  Next, the movable body LED light emission mode determination table will be described. The movable body LED light emission mode determination table is a table that determines the light emission mode of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D in the composite effect. Note that the movable body LED emission mode determination table is a table used to determine only when the movement pattern is determined using the above-described movable body movement mode determination table, and when the stop pattern is determined, the movable body LED 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D are not used because they do not emit light.

  Specifically, the movable body LED light emission mode determination table includes a white pattern that causes the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D to emit white light, a red pattern that causes the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D to emit red light, and a movable body. And a flash pattern for causing the LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D to blink. When the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are determined to be the movement patterns in the movable body movement mode determination table, these movable body LED emission modes are appropriately determined from a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern. Is done. Note that, as described later, the movable body LED light emission mode is performed for a predetermined period when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 move to the first advance position and the second advance position (after the movement ends). (See FIGS. 23A and 23B).

  Note that the movable body LED light emission mode determination table of the present embodiment describes an example having a white pattern, a red pattern, and a flash pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and has a plurality of light emission modes. Just do it. For example, the light emission mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like.

  The white pattern, the red pattern, and the flash pattern in the movable body LED emission mode determination table are displayed in the movable body LED emission mode determination table as display results of a variation display specified by a variation pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100 ( Outlier, non-probable big hit, probable big hit).

  Specifically, in the case of a loss, a white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 80%, a red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and a flash pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. In the case of a non-probable variable hit, a white pattern is determined as a light emission mode at a rate of 20%, a red pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and a flash pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, in the case of the probability change jackpot, the white pattern is determined as the light emission mode at a rate of 2%, the red pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of a loss, the white pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern and the flash pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the red pattern and the flash pattern are determined at a higher rate than the white pattern. . In other words, in the light emission mode, the red pattern and the flash pattern have a higher expectation of a big hit than the white pattern.

  Also, in the case of a non-probable variable hit, the red pattern is determined at a higher rate than the flash pattern, and for the probable variable hit, the flash pattern is determined at a higher rate than the red pattern. In other words, the flash pattern has a higher degree of expectation of the probability change hit than the red pattern.

  Next, the effect display device display mode determination table will be described. The effect display device display mode determination table is a table for determining the display mode of the effect display device 5 in the composite effect.

  Specifically, the effect display device display mode determination table includes an effect-free pattern in which no effect image is displayed by the effect display device 5, an effect A pattern in which the effect image is displayed in white by the effect display device 5, and an effect display device 5. And an effect B pattern for displaying an effect image in red. As described later, these effect display device display modes are performed for a predetermined period when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 or images thereof move to the first advance position (after the movement ends) (FIG. 23 (A), (B) and FIG. 24 (B)).

  The effect display device display mode determination table according to the present embodiment describes an example having an effect-less pattern, an effect A pattern, and an effect B pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be plural. For example, the display mode may have a blue pattern, a green pattern, a purple pattern, a rainbow pattern, or the like. In addition, as for the display mode, a plurality of patterns having different designs and the like as well as colors may be prepared.

  The effect-less pattern, the effect A pattern, and the effect B pattern are displayed in the effect display device display mode determination table in the display results (variable, non-variable) of the variable display specified by the variable pattern designation command from the game control microcomputer 100. (Variable jackpot, probability variable jackpot) are different.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss, the pattern without effect is determined as a display mode at a rate of 80%, the effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the effect B pattern is determined at a rate of 2%. . In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot, a pattern without effect is determined as a display mode at a rate of 20%, an effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 60%, and an effect B pattern is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, in the case of the probability change jackpot, the pattern without effect is determined as a display mode at a rate of 2%, the effect A pattern is determined at a rate of 18%, and the effect B flash pattern is determined at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the case of a loss, the effect-less pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect-A pattern and the effect-B pattern, and in the case of a big hit, the effect-A pattern and the effect-B pattern are larger than the effect-less pattern. Determined at a high rate. In other words, in the display mode, the effect A pattern and the effect B pattern have a higher expectation of a big hit than the no effect pattern.

  Also, in the case of a non-probable variable hit, the effect A pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect B pattern, and for the probable variable hit, the effect B pattern is determined at a higher rate than the effect A pattern. You. In other words, the effect B pattern has a higher degree of expectation of the probability change hit than the effect A pattern.

  Next, the flow of an actual composite effect will be described. First, a description will be given of a composite effect pattern 1 which is a mode of the big hit shown in FIG. Here, pattern 1 of the composite effect is determined as a movement pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table, determined as a red pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table, and determined as a flash pattern in the movable body LED emission mode determination table. It is assumed that the effect B pattern is determined in the effect display device display mode determination table.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines various effect modes based on the reception of the change pattern designation command (super reach change pattern) from the game control microcomputer 100, and thereafter, the effect display device 5 displays the effect symbols. Start variable display. Then, at a predetermined timing, the fluctuation display state of the effect symbol is set to a predetermined reach state (see FIG. 25A).

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 25B, the light guide plate 501 is turned off, that is, the light emitting region 506 does not emit light forward and the entire light guide plate 501 including the light emitting region 506 is colorless. It is in a transparent state, and the display image of the rear effect display device 5, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, and the second movable body 402 can be visually recognized (transparent) from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), the effect display device 5 performs a variable display of the effect symbol (a predetermined reach state). Further, as shown in FIG. 25D, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are located at the first standby position and the second standby position, and have the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A. 407D are off.

  Next, although not shown, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display state of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 to the reach state, starts the reach effect separately from the variable display, and then supercharges the reach effect. It is developed into an effect (for example, displaying an image in which the character performs a battle). Then, after the super reach effect is started, at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing for completing the battle, etc.), an operation promoting effect for displaying an image prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) during the period in which the operation promoting effect is being executed or the operation valid period without accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B). Is completed, that is, when the condition for starting the composite effect is satisfied, the composite effect pattern 1 (the composite effect based on the effect pattern 1) is started.

  In the pattern 1 of the combined effect, the effect control CPU 120 receives the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) or the operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) during the operation promoting effect. When the operation validity period is terminated without receiving the instruction, that is, when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied Ta1, first, the light guide plate LED 502 is turned on to execute the light guide plate effect (FIGS. 23A and 26A). reference).

  More specifically, in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, as shown in FIG. 26B, the light guide plate 501 is turned on, that is, by the dot pattern composed of the plurality of recesses 510 formed in the light emitting region 506. A predetermined image is displayed on the light guide plate 501 by the light being emitted forward and the light emitting area 506 emitting light, whereby the display image of the rear effect display device 5 and the first movable body 302L, At 302R, the second movable body 402 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize (see through) the light from the front of the light guide plate 501. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), the effect display device 5 is turned off, that is, in a state where no voltage is applied, the display screen is in a dark display (black display) state. , And no effect effect is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are located at the first standby position and the second standby position, and have the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A. 407D are off.

  Next, the first effect motor 311 and the second effect motor 425 are driven to move the first movable bodies 302L and 302R from the first standby position to the first advance position, and move the second movable body 402 from the second standby position to the first An advance operation for moving to the second advance position is started (see FIG. 23A, FIG. 27A and FIG. 28A).

  Specifically, at the time of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the start operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3), FIGS. 27B and 28 ( As shown in FIG. 27B, while the light guide plate 501 continues to be turned on, the effect display device 5 continues to be turned off, as shown in FIGS. 27C and 28C. . In addition, as shown in FIGS. 27D and 28D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 gradually move toward the first advance position and the second advance position, The movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are off.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 28A, at the end of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, Ta3 (when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are in the first advance position). And when it is located at the second advance position), the plurality of movable body LEDs 307L and 307R of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged at positions corresponding to the non-light emitting portions 507B on the back surface of the light guide plate 501, The plurality of movable body LEDs 407A to 407D of the two movable bodies 402 are arranged at positions corresponding to each of the plurality of non-light emitting portions 507A, 507C, 507D, and 507E on the back surface of the light guide plate 501.

  As described above, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are in the advancing operation (the period from the advancing operation start time Ta2 to the advancing operation end time Ta3), the light guide plate 501 has a predetermined image ( When the (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is emitted forward from the light guide plate 501, that is, to the player side. Due to the light, it becomes extremely difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state (whether or not moving or the manner of movement) of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402. The state of the second movable body 402 can be interesting.

  The mechanism part E, which is a part of the second movable body 402, becomes visible to the player when moving from the second standby position to the second advance position, but is emitted forward from the light guide plate 501. The light makes it difficult for the player to see. Further, when the second movable body 402 reaches the second advance position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second rendering unit 411B in the second movable body 402. In particular, since the first movable body 302L on the left side moves so as to overlap the front side of the mechanical part E which is a part of the second movable base 410B, the mechanical part E is concealed by the first movable body 302L and the player Becomes invisible.

  Further, when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 advance, the light guide plate 501 is in a lit state (light emission effect), and the effect display device 5 and the movable object LEDs 307L, 307R. , 407A to 407D are turned off, so that the effect of the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 and the reduction in the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are synergistically obtained. Can be

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D from the end time Ta3 of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 (FIG. 23A and FIG. 29A).

  More specifically, at the start of the light-emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, the light guide plate 501 continues to be lit as shown in FIG. As shown in (5), the effect display device 5 continues to be turned off. Further, as shown in FIG. 29D, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 maintain the state of being located at the first advance position and the second advance position, and have the movable body LED 307L. , 307R, 407A to 407D are lit.

  When the light-emitting effect is performed by the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D, the light emitted forward from the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D emits a plurality of corresponding non-lights from the back of the light guide plate 501. The light is emitted to the front side (player side) via the portions 507A to 507E. That is, at this time, not only the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 emits light by the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501, but also the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507E of the light guide plate 501 by the light emitting effect by the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D. It emits light, and the effect can be enhanced as a composite light emitting effect using the light guide plate 501 and the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 ends the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501, and performs an effect display (display effect) by the effect display device 5 from the light emission effect end time Ta4 by the light guide plate 501 (FIG. 23A and FIG. 30 (A)).

  More specifically, when the effect display is started by the effect display device 5, the light guide plate 501 is turned off as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 30C, the effect display device 5 is in an effect display state. Further, as shown in FIG. 30D, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 maintain the state of being located at the first advance position and the second advance position, and have the movable body LED 307L. , 307R, and 407A to 407D maintain the lit state.

  Note that the effect display is to display an effect image (for example, an image of lightning, a logo, a number, or the like) that is a predetermined image on the effect display device 5. In an area that does not overlap with the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the area becomes visible to the player.

  By terminating the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 in this manner, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position. That is, in the period from the time Ta1 when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied to the time Ta4 when the light-emitting effect ends (light-emitting effect period of the light guide plate 501), the light emitted forward from the light guide plate 501 causes the light emitted behind the light guide plate 501. Since the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 were difficult to see from the player, it was difficult for the player to grasp the states of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402. When the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 ends, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position become visible.

  That is, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, which should have been in the first standby position and the second standby position when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is started, are stopped when the light emission effect is completed. The player suddenly appears at the first advance position and the second advance position, that is, the player does not know that the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 have moved, which may surprise the player. it can.

  When the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position become visible, the first movable body 302L is displayed on the effect display of the effect display device 5. , 302R and the second movable body 402, so that the effect of the combined effect is improved.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs a light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D and an effect display by the effect display device 5 for a predetermined period, and then emits light by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D. And the effect display by the effect display device 5 are terminated. Then, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are moved to the first standby position and the second standby position from the time Ta5 when the light emitting effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D and the effect display by the effect display device 5 end. The evacuation operation for evacuation is performed for a predetermined period until the evacuation operation end time Ta6, and the composite effect is ended.

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays a predetermined effect symbol (for example, “7-7-7”) in the effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5 to determine the big hit. Notify.

  Next, a description will be given of a composite effect pattern 2 which is another mode in the case of the big hit shown in FIG. Here, the pattern 2 of the composite effect is determined as a movement pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table, determined as a flash pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table, and determined as a flash pattern in the movable body LED emission mode determination table. It is assumed that the effect B pattern is determined in the effect display device display mode determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, in the composite effect pattern 2, the light guide plate 501 extends from the time Tb2 at which the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 advance to the time Tb4 at which the light emission effect ends. The light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 in a flash pattern in which the light is repeatedly turned off and turned on is continuously executed. By doing in this way, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 at the time of the advancing operation and at the end of the advancing operation are in a short time when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 of the flash pattern. You will be able to see it. The intervals between turning off and lighting of the light guide plate 501 may be set as appropriate. For example, the intervals between turning off and turning on the light guide plate 501 may have different lengths.

  Next, a description will be given of a composite effect pattern 3 which is one mode in the case of a loss shown in FIG. Here, the pattern 3 of the composite effect is determined to be a stop pattern in the movable body movement mode determination table and a white pattern in the light guide plate light emission mode determination table. When the stop pattern is determined in the movable body moving mode determination table, the light emitting effect of the movable body LED is not performed, and the display effect of the effect display device is not performed. In other words, the movable body LED emission mode is not determined in the movable body LED emission mode determination table.

  In the pattern 3 of the composite effect, first, at the time Tc1 when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied, the light guide plate LED 502 is turned on to execute the light guide plate effect (see FIG. 31A). At this time, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 do not actually operate, and are waiting at the first standby position and the second standby position. Then, at the end of the light emission effect Tc4 by the light guide plate 501, the effect display device 5 displays the image P of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position. (See FIG. 31B).

  As described above, patterns 1 to 3, which are examples of the composite effect, have different degrees of expectation of winning. Specifically, the big hit expectation degree of the composite effect pattern 1 and the pattern 2 is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the compound effect pattern 3, and especially, the big hit expectation degree of the compound effect pattern 2 is the pattern of the compound effect. 1 and pattern 3 are higher. As described above, since the degree of big hit expectation varies depending on the type of the composite effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation in accordance with the type of the composite effect to be executed, thereby improving the interest. Specifically, when the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the movement pattern of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 is determined at a higher rate than in the case of a loss, and the light guide plate LED 502 The red pattern or the flash pattern is determined as the light emission mode of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D, and the effect mode A and B are determined as the display mode of the effect display device 5. Is expected, a big hit can be expected even when a stop pattern, a white pattern, and a pattern without effect appear with a low degree of expectation.

  Further, there are the following modified examples of the pattern 2 of the composite effect. As shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 23B, the effect display device 5 may display the effect when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect. In other words, in the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501, the blinking of the light guide plate 501 and the blinking of the effect display of the effect display device 5 may be repeated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, when the light guide plate 501 is turned on in the light emission effect, the effect display of the effect display device 5 is turned off. Thereby, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 at the time of the advance operation are in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize or invisible. Further, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect, the effect display of the effect display device 5 is turned on. Thereby, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be visually recognized during the advance operation. As described above, the blinking of the light guide plate 501 and the blinking of the effect display of the effect display device 5 are repeated, so that the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 that perform the advancing operation are instantaneously and continuously difficult to visually recognize. Alternatively, it is possible to perform an effect that repeats an invisible state and a visible state, thereby expanding the range of the composite effect. Further, when the effect display of the effect display device 5 is turned on when the light guide plate 501 is turned off in the light emission effect, the first movable members 302L and 302R and the second movable member 402 during the advance operation can be visually recognized. In addition, the light of the effect display device 5 is backlight when viewed from the player, the surroundings of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 in front become brighter, and the visibility from the player is reduced. That is, only the silhouettes of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 become visible. In this case, it is preferable that the effect display image of the effect display device 5 has a larger light amount than the effect display image of the embodiment.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 provided movably, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. And a light guide plate 501 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern on the player side in the depth direction that overlaps at least a part of the movement areas E1 and E2 of the second movable body 402. The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the Since the light-emitting effect of causing the light-emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 to emit light can be executed in at least a part of the moving period of the second movable body 402, the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 is executed, so that the first movable body is executed. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the movement of the 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, the effect can be improved.

  Specifically, during the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the start operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3), a predetermined image is formed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is located forward from the light guide plate 501, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, so that the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 It can be interesting to see if it is in such a state. Then, when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is completed, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 provided movably, and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body are provided. A light guide plate 501 for forming a predetermined light guide pattern on the player side in the depth direction overlapping at least a part of the movement areas E1 and E2 of the body 402, and a movement area of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402; An effect display device 5 in which a display area is arranged so as to overlap at least a part of E1 and E2, and at least a part of a moving period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. Since the light-emitting effect of causing the light-emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 to emit light can be executed, the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is executed, so that the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and The movement of the second movable member 402 is less visible, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Specifically, during the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the start operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3), a predetermined image is formed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is located forward from the light guide plate 501, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, so that the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 It can be interesting to see if it is in such a state. Then, when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is completed, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised. Further, the effect display device 5 is disposed rearward so that its display area overlaps at least a part of the moving areas E1 and E2 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, so that the light guide plate 501 is provided. , A motion effect by the first movable bodies 302L, 302R, and the second movable body 402, and a display effect by the effect display device 5 can be performed in a state where they are superimposed one on the other, respectively. Is improved.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 provided movably, and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body are provided. A light guide plate 501 for forming a predetermined light guide pattern overlapping at least a part of the movement areas E1 and E2 of the body 402 on the player side in the depth direction; and an effect display device 5, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R. In addition, it is possible to execute a light emission effect of causing the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 to emit light during at least a part of the movement period of the second movable body 402, which corresponds to the first movable bodies 302 L and 302 R and the second movable body 402. Since the effect display can be executed by the effect display device 5, the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 is executed, and thus the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable Since 402 movement is less visible, it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Specifically, during the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the start operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3), a predetermined image is formed on the light guide plate 501. When (still image) is displayed by light emission, since the light guide plate 501 is disposed in front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate 501 is located forward from the light guide plate 501, that is, on the player side. The emitted light makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 behind the light guide plate 501. In other words, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are moving, so that the player can determine which of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 It can be interesting to see if it is in such a state. Then, when the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is completed, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 Since the state can be grasped, the player can be surprised. Further, since the effect display corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be executed by the effect display device 5, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is completed and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are finished. And when the second movable body 402 becomes visible, for example, an effect that makes the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 stand out can be performed, and the interest of the combined effect is improved.

  Further, during the movement period of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, the light emitting effect is performed by the front light guide plate device 500, so that the first movable bodies 302L, 302L behind the light guide plate 501 from the player. In order to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the second movable body 402R and the second movable body 402, the front of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is covered with a shutter or the like made of a non-translucent plate. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the light emission effect of the light guide plate device 500, and to thereby make it difficult to pay attention to the movement of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402. It is possible to suitably enhance the unexpectedness when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 appear at the first advance position and the second advance position with the end. Kill.

  In addition, the second movable body 402 particularly has a first effect portion 411A, second effect portions 411B, 411D, and a third effect portion 411C, which are horizontally oriented when they are in the first standby position and overlap each other in front and rear. And is provided so as to form a predetermined form by moving to the first advance position (see FIGS. 16 and 17). That is, since the movable body has a different form when it is at the first standby position and when it has moved to the first advance position, when the first movable bodies 302L and 302R appear at the first advance position with the end of the light emission effect. Can be suitably improved.

  Further, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 are arranged at a first standby position and a second standby position different from the first standby position, and are independently movable at timings other than the composite effect. Since the effects are executable and the movable bodies approach (join) each other in the combined effect, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 move to the first advance position and the second movable Surprisingness when appearing in a united state at the second advance position can be suitably increased.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light guide effect is performed by the light guide plate device 500 in at least a part of the advance operation period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, so that the player can be behind the light guide plate 501 from the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may be difficult to visually recognize. At least a part of the second movable body 402 may be made invisible.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, increasing the light emission luminance of the light guide plate LED 502, making the emission color the same as or similar to the surface color of the movable body, It is preferable to apply at least one of darkening the surface color of the movable body (black or the like) and arranging a plurality of light guide plates 501 in a superimposed manner.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 were targeted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are Only one of the second movable bodies 402 is provided so as to overlap with at least a part of the light emitting area 506 so that visibility of one of the movable bodies becomes difficult during at least a part of the movement period. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light emission effect by the light guide plate device 500 executed in at least a part of the advance operation period of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 is performed by the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body. Although the mode executed during at least a part of the advance operation period of the two movable bodies 402 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at least part of the evacuation operation period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is continued over the advance operation period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (the period from the advance operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3). (Pattern 1 in FIG. 23A or Pattern 2 in FIG. 23B) has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are not limited thereto. It is only necessary that the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 be executable in a part of the movement period of the second movable body 402.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24B, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is started from Td1 when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied, and when the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is started. The operation may be continued during Td2, and may be terminated before Td3, when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 have advanced. As described above, the light emission effect is performed only during a part (first half) of the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof. Thus, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 become easily visible from the middle of the movement, but the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body in the middle of the movement in a situation where the operation has not been started. The sudden appearance of 402 can surprise the player.

  FIG. 24B illustrates an example in which the light-emitting effect is performed in the first half of the period from when the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is started to when the advance operation ends. The present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting effect is executed during the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof. Alternatively, the light emission effect may be executed in the latter half of the period from the start of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to the end thereof.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the composite effect, the operation effects of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, the light guide plate effect (light emission effect) by the light guide plate device 500, the first movable members 302L, 302R, and the second effect. (2) Although the embodiment including the effect by each movable body LED provided on the movable body 402 and the display effect by the effect display device 5 has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the first movable body is described. It suffices to include operation effects of the 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 and light guide plate effects by the light guide plate device 500, and light emission effects by the light guide plate device 500 and the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D, and effect display. A display effect (for example, an effect display effect or the like) corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 by the device 5 is provided. It may be one that does not row.

  In the case where the composite effect is performed only by the operation effect of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 and the light guide plate effect by the light guide plate device 500, the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507F of the light guide plate 501 are set to the light emitting area. 506 (the entire surface of the light guide plate 501 is used as the light emitting region 506) to prevent the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 from being visible from the non-light emitting portions 507A to 507F. Good. That is, when the light guide plate 501 emits light, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may be made invisible.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the composite effect is executed after the super reach effect is executed on the effect display device 5 and before a predetermined effect symbol (lottery result) is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed at appropriate timing. For example, the composite effect is executed at another timing during the variable display of the symbol, such as when the reach state is established, when the display reaches the super reach, when the symbol variable display is started, or when the pseudo ream is executed. You may make it. Also, when the jackpot symbols are aligned and then re-changed to notify that the probability change is a jackpot, or when performing a promotion effect of notifying that the player has been promoted to the probability change jackpot during the jackpot, the holding in-house during the jackpot It may be executed at other various timings, for example, when notifying that there is a big hit or when notifying that the big hit round is to be continued.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting area 506 includes the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R operating on the back side of the light guide plate 501, the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402, and the light emitting area of the effect display device 5. Although an example in which the display region is formed so as to be superimposed on the front and back of the display region is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. The light emitting region 506 may be used as long as it is formed so as to overlap at least a part of the moving regions E1 and E2 of the second movable member 402L and the second movable member 402. (For example, the mechanical portion E and the main effect portion) become difficult for the player to visually recognize during the advance movement, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302 are formed by the area (non-light-emitting area 507) other than the light-emitting area 506. And a portion of the second movable member 402 may be made visible from the player at the time of advancing movement.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the effect display device 5 and the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402 are arranged so as to overlap each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 5 and the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402 are not necessarily May not be superimposed. For example, the effect display device 5 and the moving area E1 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the moving area E2 of the second movable body 402 may be shifted left and right or up and down so as not to overlap.

  Even in this case, the effect display device 5 can execute an effect display (for example, an effect display effect) corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. In the above-described embodiment, the effect display effect is executed as an example of the effect display corresponding to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a display other than the effect, such as an effect display that displays an image (such as an image imitating the movable body) related to the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, may be used.

  Further, since the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 is performed from before the start of the movement of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and after the end of the movement of the second movable body 402, when the light-emitting effect ends, the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second Since the movement of the second movable body 402 has been completed and the movements of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 are more difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect.

  That is, the light-emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is started before the start operation Ta2 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, so that the player can use the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402L and 302R. It is difficult to grasp whether or not the second movable body 402 has started to operate, and the effect of giving interest to the states of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 is improved. Then, the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501 is performed for a predetermined period after the end operation of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 at the end of Ta3 (the period from the end of the advance operation Ta3 to the end of the emission operation Ta4). When the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 ends, the player can visually recognize the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position, and the effect is improved. I do.

  Note that a predetermined period after the advance operation end time Ta3 of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 (a period from the advance operation end time Ta3 to the light emission effect end time Ta4) can be appropriately set. For example, by setting a predetermined period longer than Ta3 at the end of the advance operation of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402, the state in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 cannot be visually recognized is set. The game may be continued for a long time to further interest the player.

  In addition, the light guide plate 501 includes an effect control CPU 120 that determines the light emission mode of the light emission effect from a plurality of types, and a CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that controls the light emission effect in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The effect control CPU 120 determines the light emission mode depending on whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the advantageous state, and emits light in the light emission mode determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501. Therefore, the player can have expectations according to the type of the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 501, so that interest can be improved.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 sends a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as the variation time of the effect symbol, the type of the reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-run to the effect control board 12. Send. The ROM 121 included in the effect control board 12 stores a movable body movement mode determination table, a light guide plate light emission mode determination table, a movable body LED light emission mode determination table, and an effect display device display mode determination table. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation display result of the symbol specified from the variation pattern designation command is a big hit display result, the movable body movement mode determination table, the light guide plate light emission mode determination table, the movable body Based on the LED light emission mode determination table and the effect display device display mode determination table, for example, various effect modes (effect patterns) are determined by lottery using random numbers for effect, and an effect is performed based on the effect mode determined by the lottery. Execute. Therefore, the moving manner of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402, the light emitting manner of the light guide plate 501, the light emitting manner of the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D, and the display manner of the effect display device 5 are changed. An effect can be performed, and for example, the light guide plate LED 502 can emit light in a white, red, or flash mode, and the player has a loss display result when the symbol fluctuation display result is a big hit display result. By causing the light to emit in red or flash at a higher rate than in the case, the player performs a red or flash light emission effect by the light guide plate device 500, thereby performing a white light emission effect. Since the big hit display result can be expected to be derived, the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the composite effect is executed by combining various effect modes, the range of the composite effect is expanded.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is exemplified as an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state advantageous to the player is For example, it includes a time-saving state in which time-saving control is performed, a probability-variable state in which probability-variable control is performed, and the like.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an effect display device 5, and the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 have movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D, and perform a light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501. At this time, the effect display device 5 and the first movable body 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 movable body LED 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are turned off, so that the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is enhanced. The visibility of the movement of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 can be further reduced. In other words, during a part of the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501, specifically, during the period from the time Ta1 when the start condition of the composite effect is satisfied to the time Ta3 when the advance operation ends, the effect display device 5 and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second effect. Since the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D of the movable body 402 are turned off, the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 stands out, and the visibility of the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 is further reduced. Act synergistically.

  Further, the second movable body 402 is a part for moving the second movable body 402 and includes a mechanism part E at least partially visible to a player when the second movable body 402 is moving at least. Since the predetermined light guide pattern is disposed in front of the movement area of the mechanical portion E in the second movable body 402, the mechanical portion E of the second movable body 402 is hardly visually recognized by the light emission effect of the light guide plate 501. be able to.

  By doing so, even if the mechanism part E of the moving mechanism part becomes visible to the player in accordance with the movement of the second movable body 402, the mechanism part E is concealed by the light emission effect by the light guide plate 501. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the mechanism portion E, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance of the second movable body 402 from being lost during the movement.

  Further, when the second movable body 402 reaches the second advance position, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R are arranged on the left and right sides of the second rendering unit 411B in the second movable body 402. In particular, since the first movable body 302L on the left side moves so as to overlap the front side of the mechanical part E which is a part of the second movable base 410B, the mechanical part E is concealed by the first movable body 302L and the player Thus, even if the light-emitting effect by the light guide plate 501 ends, the appearance of the second movable body 402 can be prevented from being impaired.

  In addition, by forming the mechanism portion E by a transmissive member having a light transmitting property, the light emitting effect of the light guide plate 501 is executed when the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position. The visibility of the mechanism part E at that time may be made more difficult.

  The first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 have movable body LEDs 307L, 307R and 407A to 407D, and the light guide plate 501 includes a light emitting area 506 forming a predetermined light guide pattern and a predetermined light guide area. Non-light-emitting areas 507A to 507E in non-light-emitting areas 507 where no light pattern is formed, and the first movable body in a state in which the movable LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are arranged so as to correspond to the non-light-emitting parts 507A to 507E. By operating the 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 to perform the light emission effect by the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D and the light guide plate 501, the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, 407A to 407D are used in the light emitting area 506. In addition to emitting light, the first non-emitting portions 507A to 507E Elements 302L, 302R and the movable member of the second movable member 402 LED307L, 307R, it is possible to emit light at 407A～407D, it is possible to improve the performance effect of emission effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example will be described in which the movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D are arranged at positions corresponding to the non-light-emitting portions 507A to 507E, which are regions surrounded by the light-emitting region 506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movable body LED is arranged so as to correspond to the non-light emitting area 507. For example, the movable body LED may be arranged so as to correspond to the non-light-emitting portion 507F in the non-light-emitting region 507.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the mode including the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 has been described. As long as they are arranged so as to overlap forward, one movable body may be provided, or three or more movable bodies may be provided. Also, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R move from the first standby position to the first advance position (from above to below), and the second movable body 402 moves from the second standby position to the second advance position (from below to above). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may move in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction or the rotation direction. Good. Note that the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 may move in the same direction so as to follow the respective movements, or may move in the intersecting direction.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting portion provided on the movable body is exemplified by a form formed by a light source such as a light emitting diode such as movable body LEDs 307L, 307R, and 407A to 407D. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the light emitting unit is configured to be able to emit light, the light source is provided separately from the light emitting unit, and the light emitting unit is configured to emit light by being guided by a light guide member or the like. Is also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the light emitting region 506 of the light guide plate 501 is configured by the plurality of recesses 510 formed on the back surface of the light guide plate 501 has been described. If the display information can be displayed on the light guide plate 501 by emitting the light from the front surface of the light guide plate 501, for example, the light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 501 is not totally reflected, The light guide plate 501 may be a light-transmitting guide portion such as a plurality of convex portions to be emitted, or may be formed inside the light guide plate 501 instead of the concave and convex portions formed on the front and rear surfaces of the light guide plate 501. It may be a reflecting portion or the like that reflects light incident inside the light guide plate 501 so that light is emitted from the front surface of the light guide plate 501.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the light guide plate 501 is transparent has been described. However, any material may be used as long as it has translucency so that light from a light source can be reflected and display information can be displayed. An opaque light guide plate may be used. Further, the light guide plate may be colored, or may be colored and transparent.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the light guide portion is configured by one light guide plate 501, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of light guide plates provided so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. May be configured. Further, when the light guide unit has a plurality of light guide plates, an image in which the first region provided in each light guide plate emits light may be different for each light guide plate. In this case, the light emitting section provided on the movable body may be arranged at a position corresponding to the non-light emitting area provided on at least one of the plurality of light guide plates.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the light guide plate device 500 is attached to the front side of the effect display device 5 of the game board 2 has been described, but the light guide plate device 500 may be attached to a place other than the front side of the effect display device 5 of the game board 2. For example, the glass window 50a of the game machine frame 3 is formed by the light guide plate 501, and the light guide plate device is configured so that light is incident on the light guide plate 501. An apparatus 500 may be provided.

  Further, in the embodiment, when the first movable bodies 302L, 302R and the second movable body 402 located at the first advance position and the second advance position become visually recognizable, the effect display of the effect display device 5 is switched to the second state. Although the form in which the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 act so as to stand out is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect image of the effect display device 5 and the first movable body The bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402 may be continuous with relevance and constitute one symbol or the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the light guide plate device 500 is illustrated as an example of the light guide unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a transmissive liquid crystal display or a transmissive liquid crystal display may be used instead of the light guide plate device 500. A type EL (electroluminescence) display device or the like may be applied.
[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 34 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium into the game area 10. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame that is openably and closably mounted inside the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2A formed in a frame shape and provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components (games to be described later) attached thereto. (Excluding the board 2).

  A hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 90 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 2A. Below the hitting ball supply tray 90, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 91 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 90, and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 92 for firing hit balls. The game board 2 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2A. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 2, there is formed a game area 10 in which the hit game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 91 is formed in a stick shape, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side on the upper surface of the lower plate main body, so that the player can hold and tilt in a plurality of directions. Stick controller 31A is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button 31C (see FIG. 35) capable of performing an instruction operation.

  A push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided on a member forming the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 90. The push button 31B mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. The push button 31B is provided with a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 35) for detecting an act of operating the push button 31B.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 10, two liquid crystal display devices, a main effect display device 9A and a sub effect display device 9B, are provided as image display devices for displaying images of various effects. The main effect display device 9A is a display device that is larger than the sub effect display device 9B. The main effect display device 9A can execute an effect display for displaying various images such as a change display (also referred to as a variable display) of effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. The sub-effect display device 9B is a smaller display device than the main effect display device 9A, and is provided below and adjacent to the main effect display device 9A. In the sub-effect display device 9B, an effect display in which an image displayed on the main effect display device 9A and an image associated with the effect, or an image independent of the image displayed on the main effect display device 9A in the effect are displayed. Is executable.

  In the game area 10, the first path among the flowing paths of the game balls is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the main effect display device 9A when viewed from the front, and a second path different from the first path is It is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the main effect display device 9A when viewed from the front. Hitting a game ball into the left area of the main effect display device 9A in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first route is called left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area of the main effect display device 9A to cause the game ball to flow down the second route is called right-handed.

  On the right side of the main effect display device 9A in the game area 10, a first special symbol display 4A that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them, and a plurality of each capable of identifying each other. A second special symbol display 4B for variably displaying a second special symbol as type identification information is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is composed of a simple and small display (7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters such as 0 to 9 and characters. The main effect display device 9A is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD), and displays various images such as a change display of a effect symbol synchronized with a change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on a display screen. A display area is provided. In this display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decoration effects (for effects) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The main effect display device 9A is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 4A, the effect display is performed on the main effect display device 9A along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 4B performs the effect display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the main effect display device 9A along with the variation display, so that it is easy to grasp the progress of the game.

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is shown on the second special symbol display 4B. When the derived display is performed, the big hit display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derived and displayed on the main effect display device 9A. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state in which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the main effect display device 9A, a symbol other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is the same symbol). Stop, swing, enlargement / reduction, or deformation in the state where the symbols match, or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are switched. Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the main effect display device 9A constitute a part of the big hit combination, the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. In other words, “reach” refers to a state in which the identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is a reach effect display (reach effect). Also, at the time of the reach, an unusual effect may be given by a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. In addition, at the time of the reach, a character (a production display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (production design or the like)) is displayed, or a background image display mode (for example, color) of the main production display device 9A is displayed. Etc.) may be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display of the background is called reach effect display. Some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach (normal reach). Such special reach is called super reach. The reach includes a basic reach, a normal reach, as a reach other than the special super reach. The normal reach is set so that a big hit is less likely to occur than the super reach.

  After reaching the reach state, when a result other than the big hit display result is displayed in a manner in which the reach symbol is formed, the reach is referred to as a deviation. In a mode in which the reach symbol is not formed without reaching the reach state, when a shift display result is obtained, a non-reach shift is called a shift.

  Below the main effect display device 9A, a winning device having a first starting winning ball device (first starting winning port, normal winning ball device) 6A is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning ball device 6A is guided to the back of the game board 2, and is detected by the first starting port switch 22A.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning opening 6A, there is provided a variable winning ball device 6 having a second starting winning ball device (second starting winning hole, a normal variable winning ball device) 6B capable of winning game balls. Have been. The variable winning prize ball device 6 is provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (so-called electric tulips) that can be opened and closed by electric power on the upper part of the second starting prize ball device 6B. This is disadvantageous for a player who cannot enter the game, and when the movable wing piece is in an open state, the state is controlled to be advantageous for a player who can enter a game ball. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, a game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning ball device 6A than the second starting winning ball device 6B.

  On the left side of the main effect display device 9A, there is provided an ordinary symbol display device 20 for variably displaying ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the symbol display 20 is generally realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 20 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small-sized display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  On the right side of the main effect display device 9A, there is provided a gate 32 that enables execution of a variable display of a normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 20 based on the passing of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning prize ball device 6 is closed for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. To an open state that is advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 20, an ordinary symbol holding storage display (ordinary symbol holding display) 25C having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32 is provided. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 25C normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time when the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 20 is started, the number of the lighted LEDs is reduced by one.

  When the variable prize ball device 6 is opened based on the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20, the game ball is in a state in which it is possible to win the second start winning opening 6B. The game ball that has won the second start winning port 6B is guided to the back of the game board 2 and is detected by the second start port switch 22B. The variable winning ball device 6 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable prize ball device 6 is opened, the game ball can enter the second start prize ball device 6B (the start prize can be easily won), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. When the variable winning prize ball device 6 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting prize ball device 6B than the first starting prize ball device 6A. When the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning ball device 6B. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, a game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning ball device 6A than the second starting winning ball device 6B.

  In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, when the game ball is played). After passing (including winning) the first starting winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning ball device 6B as a starting winning area, the start condition of the variable display (for example, the case where the number of stored memories is not 0). In this state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a state in which the variable display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed. ), The display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through an area which is determined in advance as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and is a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) the winning opening. . Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed. Also, for a variable display in which the start condition has not been satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning ball apparatus 6B, a range of a predetermined upper limit number Storing the information within is called pending storage. The term on-hold storage is also used to indicate (identify) information on on-hold storage (called on-hold storage information or on-hold information). As described above, the pending display is a display of a variable display that has not been started yet as a pending display.

  Above the second special symbol display 4B, there is a second holding display (a second special display) consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second starting winning ball apparatus 6B, that is, the second number of stored memories. A symbol hold storage display 25B is provided. The second hold indicator 25B increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 4B is started, the number of the lighted displays is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second holding indicator 25B, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning ball device 6A, that is, the first holding memory number (the holding memory is also referred to as a starting memory or a starting winning memory). A first hold display (first special symbol hold storage display) 25A including four displays to be displayed is provided. The first hold display 25A increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 4A is started, the number of lighted displays is reduced by one.

  The gaming machine includes a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 92 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 10. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device enters the game area 10 through a hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 10, and thereafter descends from the game area 10. When the game ball enters the first starting winning ball device 6A and is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, The first start condition under which the variable display of the first special symbol can be started is satisfied), the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 4A, and the main effect display is performed. The variable display of the effect symbol is started in the device 9A. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning ball device 6A. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, in the first starting winning ball device 6A, a game ball from the first path on the left side of the main effect display device 9A can be won by the arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 10. However, it is impossible to win a game ball from the second route on the right side of the main effect display device 9A. Therefore, only when the player makes a left hit, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning ball device 6A.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning ball device 6B and is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, The second start condition that allows the start of the variation display of the second special symbol is satisfied), the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 4B, and the main effect display is performed. The variable display of the effect symbol is started in the device 9A. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning ball device 6B. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the second starting prize ball device 6B includes a first route on the left side of the main effect display device 9A and a second route on the right side of the main effect display device 9A, depending on the arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 10. It is possible to win game balls from both. However, since the gate 32 used as a condition for executing the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol, which is a condition for opening the second starting winning ball device 6B, is provided on the second route on the right side of the main effect display device 9A, When aiming for a prize in the second starting prize ball device 6B, it is necessary to strike the game ball to the right to aim for the passage to the gate 32. Therefore, the game ball enters the second starting winning ball device 6B mainly from the second path at the time of right-handing.

  The main effect display device 9A is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. The effect symbols as symbols in ()) are displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the effect symbol are synchronized. The change display of the second special symbol and the change display of the effect symbol are synchronized. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, the combination of the effect symbols reminiscent of the big hit as the big hit display result is stopped and displayed on the main effect display device 9A. .

  At the lower end in the display area of the main effect display device 9A, a hold display area in which images (called hold images or hold displays) that display the hold information that has occurred is displayed corresponding to the number of hold storage information is provided. It is formed (reserve display area 5H in FIG. 46). In the suspension display area, the suspension storage information is displayed in a format in which the first suspension storage number and the second suspension storage number are distinguished. In the main effect display device 9A, the first reserved storage number is displayed in the left reserved display area, and the second reserved storage number is displayed in the right reserved display area. By distinguishing the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information can be easily distinguished.

  During execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspended display deleted (moved, shifted) from the pending display area, an image showing the variable corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as an active image or an active display) Is formed at the center of the hold display area (active display area AHA in FIG. 46 and the like). In the active display area, it is specified that the suspended image displayed in the suspended display area corresponds to the suspended image displayed so far, for example, is moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image is displayed in a possible manner. The active display area may be arranged at any position in the display area of the main effect display device 9A.

  Note that the hold display area may display the hold storage information in a display mode in which the first hold display area and the second hold display area are added together without distinction. Such a summed suspension storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 33, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and is in an open state (advantageous in that a game ball can be won) for a player and a closed state (advantageous in that a game ball cannot be won) for a player. ). A specific game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 4B. The open / close plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 17 in the (big hit game state), so that the big winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit game state, the repetition continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repetition continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open is called a round.

  In the lower part of the game board 2, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the upper left and right sides and lower left and right sides of the game area 10. On the outer periphery of the game area 10, a frame LED 28 provided on a front frame is provided. In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 34, the big hit probability after the big hit game state ends, the base after the big hit game state ends, the fluctuation time after the big hit game state ends, the number of releases in the big hit ( Number of rounds) and the opening time of each round.

  Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable prize ball device 7 is set to the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The closed state is established when the number of (for example, 10) winning balls has been established (opening end condition). When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches the upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

  Of the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the special game state is a probable change state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal game state which is not the probable change state). The type (type) of the big hit that shifts to (probable abbreviation of the probability variation state, also referred to as the high probability state) is called “probable big hit”. The special game state may be controlled to a time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state, in association with the probability change state.

  The shift to the time reduction state shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol, so that when the time reduction state is reached, an effective start winning is easily generated and the possibility of being controlled to the big hit game is increased. Of the big hits, the type (type) of the big hit that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15 round big hit game state is referred to as “normal big hit”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency with which the variable prize ball device 6 enters the open state is increased by increasing the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable prize ball device 6 accompanying the probability change state or the time saving state. There is a case where the electric chu support control state for facilitating the prize winning in the variable prize ball device 6 (higher entry and higher frequency) is controlled. Since the electric tuner support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  The control of the electric chew support includes a control of shortening the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of deriving the display result) to quickly derive and display the display result (ordinary symbol shortening control), and an ordinary symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stopped symbol becomes a hit symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to extend the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 6 is opened Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When this control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable prize ball device 6 is in the open state is higher than when this control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting prize ball device 6B is reduced. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to start and win (the conditions for executing the variable display on the special symbol displays 4A and 4B and the main effect display device 9A are more easily satisfied). With this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning ball device 6B is increased, and thereby a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning ball device 6B is increased by the electric chew support control (high-frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning to the number of firing balls. Since a certain “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. When such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Further, such control is control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball device 6 by supporting winning with the variable winning ball device 6, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chewing support control”.

  In this embodiment, the term “high-probability state (probable-variable state)” and “low-probability state (non-probable-variable state)” are used as terms indicating the state of the jackpot probability. , “High base state (power control support state)” and “low base state (non-power support control state)”. The terms “low-probability low-base state” and “high-probability high-base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the jackpot probability and the state of the base. The “low-probability low-base state” is a state that indicates that the state of the jackpot probability is the low-probability state and that the base state is the low-base state. The “high-accuracy high-base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is the high-probability state and that the state of the base is the high-base state.

  When controlled to the high probability state, it is controlled to the time saving state and the high base state, but the time saving state and the high base state are controlled to the time saving state and the high base state since the control start condition and the end condition are the same. In some cases, this state is represented by the term “time saving state”, and in other cases, it is represented by the term “high base state”.

  Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which a game ball can enter the first starting winning ball device 6A only from the first route on the left side of the main effect display device 9A, the second starting winning ball device 6B is higher than the high base state. In a low base state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter, it is common for the player to execute a special symbol change display by aiming for the game ball to enter the first starting winning ball device 6A by left-handing. It is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gate 32 is provided in the second path on the right side of the main effect display device 9A, so that the high base state in which the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning ball device 6B than the low base state. It is general that the player performs a variable display of a special symbol by striking right and aiming for a game ball to enter the gate 32 and the second winning ball device 6B.

  Therefore, in the low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning ball device 6B than in the high base state, the player makes a left strike to aim for the game ball to enter the first starting winning ball device 6A. Is common, only the first hold storage is likely to occur, and only the hold image corresponding to the first hold storage is mainly displayed as the hold display. On the other hand, in the high base state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning ball device 6B than in the low base state, the player strikes right to aim the game ball to enter the second starting winning ball device 6B. Is general, only the second reserved storage is likely to occur, and only the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved storage is mainly displayed as the reserved display.

  As shown in FIG. 34, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled to a non-probable change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low-probability high base state) after the end of the fifteen rounds of the jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probable change state continues until the next big hit occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are changed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times, The condition continues until the earlier condition of the occurrence of the condition is satisfied.

  The probable jackpot is a jackpot in which, after the end of the fifteenth round jackpot game state, control is performed to shift to the probable change state, the time saving state, and the high base state (highly reliable high base state). In the probable big hit, the condition that such a high-probability high base state is performed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next big hit occurs occurs, whichever is earlier. Continue until you do.

  FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 11. FIG. 35 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 12, and the like. The payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 according to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls. On the main board 11, a game control microcomputer 100 for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 for storing a program for game control (game progress control) and the like, a RAM 102 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 and an I / O 105 for performing control operations according to the program. The game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 101 and a RAM 102 are built. The game control microcomputer 100 further includes a built-in random number circuit 104 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by hardware circuits).

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created by a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply). In particular, at least data corresponding to a game state, that is, a control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag or the like) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, since the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 101, the game control microcomputer 100 (or the CPU 103) hereinafter executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 11.

  The random number circuit 104 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol change display. The random number circuit 104 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted), the read numerical data has a random number generation function that becomes a random value. The game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that supplies detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100 is also mounted on the main board 11. Further, an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 6 and a solenoid 17 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided on the main board. 11 is mounted.

  Further, the microcomputer 100 for game control includes a first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B for variably displaying a special symbol, a normal symbol display 20 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first holding display 25A. , The display control of the second hold display 25B and the normal symbol hold storage display 25C.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control microcomputer 115, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a VDP 109, an I / O 125, and the like. The ROM 121 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 122 is used as a work memory. The ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 115. The VDP 109 performs display control of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 115.

  The effect control microcomputer 115 is an effect control command for instructing effect contents from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 77 that allows a signal to pass in only one direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition to performing various display controls such as variable display control in the main effect display device 9A, and controlling the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board. Various effects control is performed by controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via 70.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on trigger button 31C of stick controller 31A has been detected from trigger sensor 35C via an input port. Further, effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on push button 31B has been detected from push sensor 35B via an input port. Further, the effect control CPU 120 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation of the technician to the operation stick of the stick controller 31A is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit (controller sensor unit) 35A to the input port. To enter through. Further, effect control CPU 120 causes stick controller 31A to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to vibrator motor 126 via the output port.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 36 shows types of random numbers, update ranges, applications, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether to make a big hit. The random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot, and probable jackpot) and the jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination and jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the variation pattern type). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value).

  The big hits in the specific gaming state include a plurality of types, a normal big hit and a probability changing big hit. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the type of the big hit is determined, the big hit symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  Further, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the variation pattern type, and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) to include any of the variation pattern types determined. Is determined to be the fluctuation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is sometimes called a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type without a reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type with a reach. Such a variation pattern type is set such that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state when the display result is out of order. , The fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set.

  FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 37A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time (non-probable change state) big hit determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not the probable change state, that is, a non-probable change state), and a positive change time big hit determination table used in the probable change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 37A is set as a big hit determination value in the normal time big hit determination table, and is written in the right column of FIG. 37A in the probability change big hit determination table. Are set as the jackpot determination values. In the probable change state, it is determined that a big hit is more likely than in the normal state.

  At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). If any of the big hit determination values shown matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (usually a big hit or a probable big hit). Note that “probability” illustrated in FIG. 37A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 37B and 37C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 37 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used when determining the jackpot type using the holding memory (first holding memory) based on the game ball winning the first starting winning ball device 6A. (For the first special symbol). FIG. 37 (C) is a second special symbol big hit type determination table used when determining the big hit type using the holding memory (second holding memory) based on the game ball winning the second starting winning ball device 6B. It is.

  Each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination tables in FIG. 37 (B) and FIG. 37 (C) is used for determining a big hit type when the determination is made that the fluctuation display result is a big hit symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of the jackpot is determined to be one of “normal jackpot” and “probably variable jackpot”, and is referred to for determining a jackpot symbol.

  In each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination tables in FIGS. 37B and 37C, the first special symbol big hit type determination table has a numerical value to be compared with a random value of 1. In addition, a determination value (big hit type determination value) corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable change big hit” is set. As shown in FIGS. 37B and 37C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, a variation pattern table used in the game control microcomputer 100 to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing, in a table form, a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern.

  FIG. 38 (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is out of position, and FIG. (C) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a positive change big hit determination table. Each of the determination tables shown in FIGS. 38A to 38D is stored in the ROM 101, is selected according to a game state, and is used to determine (determine) a variation pattern type and a variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 38 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3 and the variation pattern belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including. In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table in FIG. 38, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach the reach.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main effect display device 9 </ b> A performs a predetermined operation on the main effect display device 9 </ b> A until the display result is derived and displayed after the effect symbols as identification information and the first and second special symbols are started to change and display. There is a case where an effect called a pseudo-sequence as an effect mode (hereinafter, referred to as a pseudo-sequence effect) is executed. The pseudo-ream is a pseudo-representation display that shows what appears to be a single change corresponding to one hold storage as if a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold storages are being performed continuously. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is defined as a pattern in which the fluctuation display (variable display) of the symbol is performed a plurality of times in response to one start winning, so that the symbol is displayed within the fluctuation time determined for one start winning. Indicates a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of times of repeated execution of re-variation (the total number of variations including the initial variation and subsequent re-variations, also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuous variations), the greater the reliability of a big hit (the difference from a big hit) For all the selection ratios including the time, the degree of the ratio selected when the big hit is made, the degree of the big hit ratio, that is, the reliability of the big hit is increased. More specifically, by increasing the ratio selected when it is determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo continuous production whether or not a big hit gaming state is set. In the pseudo-run variation pattern, the pseudo-continuation symbol is temporarily stopped in the main effect display device 9A. As the pseudo-sequence symbol, a pseudo-serial-only design that is not included in the effect design that is normally displayed in a variable manner (basically, a variable display) (for example, a design in which predetermined characters or characters are attached (numbers are not attached) Out of a combination of effect symbols that are normally displayed in a variable manner (basically, a variable display), or a combination of pseudo-simulated symbols set as a combination of pseudo-sequence symbols (pseudo-sequence). As the temporary stop symbol, only a predetermined type of temporary stop symbol may be temporarily stopped, and a temporary stop symbol selected from a plurality of types of temporary stop symbols is temporarily determined. It may be stopped.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect in which the effect symbol slides may be performed. Here, the slip means an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super-reach, after one of the two effect symbols temporarily stopped in the left-right symbol display area (combination of the missing symbols) in the left and right symbol display areas and then stopped, the reach-reach point (reach) is reached. (Combination of symbols), and a reach effect is executed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second to fourth super reach, which is a part of the variation patterns of the super reach provided in plural types, the variation display of the pseudo series is executed (the pseudo series is displayed). Has a fluctuating time at which the fluctuating display is performed). In the second super-reach, the fluctuating display is performed twice (first time fluctuation + one re-fluctuation) in the pseudo series, and in the third super reach, the fluctuating display is performed three times (first time fluctuation + two times of the fluctuation) in the pseudo series, In the fourth super reach, the fluctuating display is performed four times (first fluctuation + three fluctuations) in the pseudo series. In the super-reach, a fluctuation pattern of only the pseudo-running may be executed. For example, in a fluctuation pattern of only the pseudo-running, for example, a symbol in the first fluctuation of the pseudo-run (first time of the pseudo-run) In the display area, an effect is performed in which a pseudo continuous symbol appears and temporarily stops, and an effect in which the pseudo continuous symbol slides is performed. In the left and right symbol display areas, temporary stop is performed at an outgoing appearance (combination of unconnected symbols). When one of the two effect symbols slides and then stops, a reach effect (combination of reach symbols) is formed, and an effect is performed in which a reach effect is performed, thereby providing a pseudo-ream effect. However, no re-variation is performed.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of “fourth super reach (60 seconds) [four consecutive runs]” shown in the column of “fluctuation pattern” in FIG. Is the fourth super-reach variation pattern in which a pseudo-run effect is performed in which the variation time is 60 seconds and the variation display is performed four times including the first variation and the re-variation during the variation display. Is shown.

  In the table of FIG. 38, the columns described as “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” indicate the function as a variation pattern type determination table unit that indicates the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type”. It is a column to show. In the table of FIG. 38, the columns described as “random three ranges” and “variation patterns” are columns indicating the function as a variation pattern determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random three ranges” and “variation patterns”. is there. All values of random 3 (1 to 220) are allocated to each of the plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type in a plurality of numerical value ranges.

  When the fluctuation display result is out of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a determination table is selected as follows to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the non-time saving state, when the result of the fluctuation display is out of order, the out-of-normal state out-of-state judgment table in FIG. On the other hand, when the result of the fluctuation display is out of order in the time reduction state, the out-of-time reduction state determination table in FIG. 38B is selected.

  When the fluctuation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time saving state is set or not, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 38C is selected. If the result of the fluctuation display is a large-variable big hit regardless of whether or not the time saving state is set, the large-variable big hit determination table of FIG. 38D is selected.

  38 (b) and the normal state deviation time determination table shown in FIG. 38 (a), data are set so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. Is set. As a result, the on-hold digestion time during the reduced working hours can be reduced.

  In the determination tables of FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b) which are selected when the game goes off, the ratio (reach is selected) in which the super-reach reach effect is performed when the big hit occurs compared to when the game goes off. Data is set so as to increase the ratio of the super-reach's reach effect at the same time. Thereby, a super-reach reach effect is performed, thereby increasing the player's expectation.

  In addition, the determination table of FIG. 38 (d) selected when a big hit is a big hit, and the determination table of FIG. 38 (c) selected when a big hit is a big hit, In such a case, the data is set so that the ratio at which the super-reach reach effect is performed (the ratio of the super-reach reach effect when the reach is selected) is higher than at the time of the normal jackpot. Thereby, the super-reach reach effect is performed, so that the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit can be increased.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of an effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands shown in FIG. 39 to the effect control microcomputer 115 according to the game control state.

  In this embodiment, in the prize-winning effect process (see S1215 in FIG. 42), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit will occur at the time of starting prize, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Is within the range of the determination values. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a big hit type are set, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. A value for designating the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 115 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning based on the value set in the symbol designating command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (hold storage data) corresponding to hold storage on the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 102.

  In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) as a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning ball device 6B, the CPU 103 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 104 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and extracts them. , A process of storing (storing) in a storage area in the first or second hold storage buffer. Specifically, these random numbers are extracted based on the winning in the first starting winning ball device 6A and stored in the first holding storage buffer. Further, based on the winning in the second starting winning ball device 6B, these random numbers are extracted and stored in the second holding storage buffer. The fact that the information on the starting winning prize as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “held on hold”. As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of the start winning and used for a pre-reading notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When the first winning prize ball device 6A or the second starting prize ball device 6B receives a start prize, a symbol designation command, a change type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a first (second) A command indicating a determination result of the start winning prize determination processing (for example, the winning prize production processing of S1215 and S1225), such as a command for specifying the number of reserved storages, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The received winning designating command buffer provided in the RAM 122 of the effect control microcomputer 115 stores the received symbol designating command, variation type command, first (second) starting winning designating command, and first (second) winning designating command. A storage area for storing data capable of specifying a received command is secured so that various commands such as a reserved storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the data of the effect control pattern of the effect symbol that is performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the variation display operation of the effect symbol corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. , Etc., and data indicating control contents of various effecting operations, such as an effect displaying operation in a reach effect, or various effecting operations not accompanied by a variable display of effect symbols. In addition, the data of the announcement effect control pattern for giving an advance notice regarding various game states such as a big hit is obtained from data indicating control contents of an effect operation to be an advance effect performed in response to an advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. It is configured. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are configured with data indicating the control contents thereof.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is executed. In addition, various game controls can be executed. In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, normal initialization processing, non-normal game state restoration processing, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of the random number circuit 104), display random number updating processing (variation pattern , Random number update processing such as determination of the type of a random number, variation pattern determination, and the like, and random number update processing for an initial value (update processing of the initial value of the count value of the normal random number generation counter for symbol per contact determination) and the like.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been reached) is executed (S20). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of these are determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first reservation display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, and the normal symbol reservation storage display 25C is performed. A display control process to be performed is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the ordinary symbol display 20, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each of the determination random numbers such as the normal symbol hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number used in the game control is performed (determination random number updating process: S23). . Next, a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is performed (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25). Next, a special symbol process is performed (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. Is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the ordinary symbol process process, a process for controlling the display state of the ordinary symbol display 20 in a predetermined order is executed. The CPU 103 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (effect control command control process: S28). Next, an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer is performed (S29). Next, a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 is executed (S30).

  Next, the contents related to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port are output to the output port (S31: output processing). Next, a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag is performed (S32). .

  Next, a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for effecting the display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag is performed (S33). . Next, by outputting a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 20 is executed. Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, as described above, the RAM 102 stores the reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as the random number for the jackpot determination obtained based on the winning start of the first starting prize ball device 6A. A first holding storage buffer to be stored and a second holding storage for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a random number for a jackpot determination obtained based on a winning start in the second starting prize ball device 6B. A buffer is provided. In each pending storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the number of storages in each pending storage is secured.

  In the start-up opening switch passage process, if the first start-up opening switch 22A is turned on, the storage number of the first reserved storage data is provided on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for determining a big hit, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and a variation pattern determination) are output from a random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number. (A random number for use) is extracted and stored (stored) in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second starting port switch 22B is on, the second number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved storage number counter is increased by one, and numerical data (for example, a random number for determining a big hit, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed.

  In the following description related to the hold storage, the fact that the information related to the starting winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “held on hold”. The numerical data stored in the first storage buffer may be referred to as first storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second storage buffer may be referred to as second storage information.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining a big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number), and counts the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of a variable time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115. The special symbol change process (S303) is a process in which the process proceeds to a special symbol stop process when the change time of the change pattern selected in the change pattern setting process has elapsed. The special symbol stop process (S304) is to display the variation display on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is measured by the variation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stopped symbol.

  The special winning opening opening process (S305) is a process of performing control for opening the special winning opening in the special variable winning sphere device 7 according to the type of the big hit. The special winning opening opening process (S306) confirms that the control for transmitting an effect control command for the round display effect in the big hit gaming state to the effect controlling microcomputer 115 and that the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining round, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening process (S305). When all rounds have been completed, the process shifts to big hit end processing (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process of performing display control or the like for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the flow shifts to S1221. If the first startup port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1222.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved storage number counter by one (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 104 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined at the time of the start prize (S1215).

  After a start winning has occurred in the first starting winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning ball device 6B, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning are stored as the hold storage information, the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied. At the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S300), based on the hold storage information, the variable display result of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) for which the variable display is started. Is determined as a jackpot display result, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) is performed based on the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Perform based on

  On the other hand, apart from this determination, the timing before the variable display based on the start winning on the first starting winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning ball device 6B is started, specifically, the game ball is first started. At the timing when the winning prize ball device 6A or the second starting prize ball device 6B is activated (at the timing when the retained storage information is stored), the pre-reading is performed on the pending storage information storing the various data obtained at the time of the starting prize. Based on the held storage information, the determination as to whether or not a big hit will be made, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined in advance is a big hit determination value and a big hit type determination set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. A prize-winning-state effect process for performing pre-read determination based on the value and the fluctuation pattern type determination value is executed. By doing so, the effect control microcomputer 115 predicts the fluctuation display result in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, the effect symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big hit (the possibility of a big hit) during the fluctuation display.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (S1216), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 115. The control is performed (S1217). Also, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserved storage number counter to EXT data to designate the first reserved storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first state is performed regardless of the gaming state (high-probability state, low-probability state, high-base state, low-base state, big-hit game state, and the like). Every time the start winning prize ball device 6A wins, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 115.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning is generated to the first starting winning ball apparatus 6A, a symbol designation command, a change type command, a first starting winning designation is designated. A set of four commands, a command and a first reserved storage number designation command, is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starting port switch 22B is not on, the processing is terminated. If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by one (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 104 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a jackpot determination random number (random R), a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes the prize-winning effect processing as described in S1215 (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control of transmitting a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (S1226), and controls transmission of the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 115. Is performed (S1227). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (S1228), and sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter to EXT data to designate the second reserved storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as the high-probability state, the low-probability state, the high-base state, the low-base state, and the big-hit game state), the second state is established. Every time the start winning prize ball device 6B starts winning, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 115.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning is generated in the second starting winning ball device 6B, a symbol designating command, a change type command, a second starting winning designating. A command and a set of four commands, ie, a command for specifying the total number of storages to be held, are transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer has pending storage data (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 103 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) is set. Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 4A will be described below, depending on whether data indicating "first" or data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 4A performs a variable display of the first special symbol on the basis of the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. It is. On the other hand, when the data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is performed based on the hold storage data stored in the second hold memory buffer. Done.

  According to the control of S52 to S54, if at least one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol display 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage is It is executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol display 4A based on the data of the first hold storage.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in a random number buffer of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one, and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 stores the first reserved storage buffer in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the numbers stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S57). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is to be performed on the first winning prize ball device 6A, that is, "first" indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. "1", or "2" indicating that the process is to be performed on the second starting winning ball device 6B, that is, "2" indicating that the process is to be performed on the second special symbol. Is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S60). In this case, the CPU 103 extracts and stores in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S214 of the start opening switch passage process or S224 of the start opening switch passage process, and reads out the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process. The big hit determination is performed for the big hit determination random numbers stored and stored. The jackpot determination module is a program that performs a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 37) with a jackpot determination random number and, if they match, determines a jackpot. That is, it is a program for executing the process of determining a big hit.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that the probability of a big hit is higher when the game state is in the probable change state (high probability state) than in the non-probable change state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. More specifically, the large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 101 in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 37A is set) in which a large number of big-hit determination values are set in advance, A normal-time jackpot determination table (a table in the ROM 101 in which numerical values on the left side in FIG. 37A are set) that is set to be smaller than the time-and-big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming state is in the probable change state. If the gaming state is in the probable change state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probable change time jackpot determination table. When the state is a play state or a time saving state, a big hit determination process is performed using the normal time big hit determination table. That is, if the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 37 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (S60), the process proceeds to S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  Whether or not the current game state is the probable change state is determined based on whether or not the probable change flag is set. The certainty change flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certainty change state, and is reset when the certainty change state ends. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and thereafter, one of a condition that a predetermined number of times (100 times) of fluctuation display is performed and a condition that the next big hit is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the special symbol is reset at the timing when the change display of the special symbol is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S60), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the random number for big hit determination (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in S60, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (S71). The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends. As a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, a first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 37 (B) and a second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 37 (C). One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 37B.

  In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table in FIG. 37C.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for jackpot type determination which is extracted in the starting port switch passing process, stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and read and stored in the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process, Using the big hit type determination table selected in S72, the big hit type and big hit symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer are determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (B) and (C), the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol so that the big hit type is different for each big hit type. Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control according to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  The CPU 103 also stores (sets) the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is stored (set) as big hit type data. When the jackpot type is “probable change jackpot”, “02” is stored (set) as the jackpot type data.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). If the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a lost symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol determined in S73 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be “normal jackpot”, “3” is set as the stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be “probably variable jackpot”, “7” is determined as the stop symbol. Next, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  In the above-described variation pattern setting process (S301), the CPU 103 performs the following process. In addition to checking whether the big hit flag is set or not, according to the big hit type information stored in S74 and the time saving information indicating which state is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state, FIG. Select one of the normal state out-of-office judgment table, the time reduction state out-of-office judgment table, the normal big hit judgment table, and the probable change big hit judgment table, and select random 2 from the random number buffer (variation pattern type judgment random number). And random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) are read out, and the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined to be one of a plurality of types using the selected determination table. Then, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted, and the first symbol variation designation command or the first symbol variation designation command is used as a command for designating the start of variation of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer. A process of transmitting the second symbol change designation command is performed. Then, control for starting the change of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer is executed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (S302), and the display result specifying command is transmitted. Proceed to processing.

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S302), the CPU 103 performs any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation commands for designating the display result according to the type of the determined jackpot or the loss. Control for transmitting a control command (see FIG. 39) is performed. In the special symbol change processing (S303), the CPU 103 decrements the variable time timer by one, and when the variable time timer times out, updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S304). Then, proceed to the special symbol stop processing.

  If the result of the fluctuation display indicates a big hit, the big win game opening pre-process (S305), the big win opening process (S306), and the big hit end process (S307) are executed to control the big hit gaming state. Is done. In the big hit end processing (S307), the probable change flag and the time saving flag are set at the time of the end of the probability changing big hit, and the time saving flag is set at the end of the normal big hit. Thus, after the end of the jackpot, the state is controlled to the probable change state and the time saving state.

  The time-saving state after the probability change big hit and the normal big hit needs to be continued until one of the conditions until the change display is executed 100 times or until the next big hit occurs. In such a continuous period of 100 variable displays, in the big hit end process (S307), the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state is set to 100 times, and thereafter, every time the variable display is executed. In the special symbol stop process, control is performed by subtracting and updating, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving number counter, so that the time saving state is terminated.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 115 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control microcomputer 115 (specifically, the production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12.

  When power is turned on, effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing a RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining a start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control is performed (S701). ). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can specify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 122) and the like (command analysis processing: S704). Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (S705). In the effect control process processing, in order to perform various effects such as a variation display of effect symbols on the main effect display device 9A in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes according to the control state is performed. The effect corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and effect control is executed.

  Next, the random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 115 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol) SR2 for determining the presence of a pre-reading effect, SR3 for selecting a pre-fetching effect type, SR4 for selecting the same-color design effect pattern, SR5 for selecting a change effect pattern for hold, SR6 for selecting an effect pattern for change suggestion for hold, pseudo pseudo effect type selection Random number SR7, a random number SR8 for determining whether or not an active change suggestion effect is performed, a random number SR9 for determining whether or not an active change effect is performed, a random number SR10 for selecting the same color design effect pattern, a random number SR11 for selecting an active change effect type, an active change SR12 for effect pattern selection, SR13 for active change suggestion effect pattern selection, and Executing the random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the various random number) containing SR14 for the current pending color selection (S706). Each of the random numbers SR1-1 to SR7 is generated by the count of a random counter that updates the count value by software, is cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and is extracted at a predetermined timing. Used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S707). In the hold storage display control process of S707, display control of an active display (active display) displayed in the active display area is also performed. Specifically, display control is performed in the following processing. For example, in the process of S704, a predetermined first update flag is set when a first symbol change designation command transmitted at the start of the change of the first special symbol is set, and transmitted at the start of the change of the second special symbol. When a received second symbol change designation command is received, a predetermined second update flag is set. If the first update flag is set, in the process of S707, one first hold display in the hold display area is deleted, and the remaining first hold displays are moved one by one toward the active display area. The display is shifted and the display of the hold display area is updated, and the active display corresponding to the erased hold display is displayed (shifted) in such a manner that the active display appears in the active display area, and the display of the active display area is updated. If the second update flag is set, in the process of S707, one second hold display in the hold display area is deleted, and the remaining second hold displays are shifted one by one toward the active display area. Then, the display of the hold display area is updated, the active display corresponding to the erased hold display is displayed in the active display area (shift), and the display of the active display area is updated. After that, the processing shifts to S702.

  By executing such an effect control main process, in the effect control microcomputer 115, the main effect display device 9A, various lamps, Also, by controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, after determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect and executing a look-ahead effect process (S700) for selecting a type of the prefetch effect, S800 to S807 are performed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Of any of the above.

  In the effect control process processing, the following processing is executed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the main effect display device 9A is controlled, and the variation display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the symbol is also executed by one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process of performing pre-reading determination, such as whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect refers to the pre-reading of the hold information and the change of the special symbol based on the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on certain hold information (hold storage information) arrives. This is an effect technique in which the content of the display is determined, and how the special symbol in the future will be changed is displayed at an earlier stage. For example, when specifying that the hold information will be a big hit, before performing the variable display by the hold information, based on the display form of the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold information, later, An effect (see FIG. 46 and the like) for giving notice that a big hit may occur is performed as a look-ahead effect. The hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target hold information”. The variable display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target variable display”. The hold display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target hold display”, and the active display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target active display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the like. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling so that the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. The effect symbol fluctuation process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop processing (S803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the variation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process of performing display control such as a control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the main effect display device 9A after the end of the fluctuation time. The processing during the round (S805) is processing for controlling display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to the post-round process. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end process. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for controlling display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the mid-round processing. The big hit end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player of the end of the big hit game state on the main effect display device 9A.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the process stored in the ROM 121 during the predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. An effect device (effect component) such as the main effect display device 9A is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table includes a process timer set value and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data stores, for example, data indicating the mode of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variable display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the main effect display device 9A is stored. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 120 can perform an effect control of displaying the hold display and the active display displayed on the main effect display device 9A in a manner that can indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  Each of the hold image for holding display and the active image for active display is displayed in different display modes depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result becomes the big hit display result, that is, the ease of display when the big hit display result becomes. It is possible. Each of the reserved image and the active image is displayed in a predetermined shape such as a circle, for example, and can be displayed in different image colors depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit display result. Each of the reserved image and the active image has a magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation such that white (normal color) <blue <green <red, and the degree of expectation at which the degree of expectation differs according to the type of image color (color mode) is a big hit. Can be suggested.

  Based on the generation of the new hold storage information, when a display in which the hold image corresponding to the new hold storage information appears on the main effect display device 9A is performed, the new hold image has a normal color (white) and a blue color. , Green, or red. The display mode of the suspended image may be changed by a look-ahead effect as described below.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, information on the variable display of the hold storage information displayed on hold is pre-read before the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pre-read result is displayed. Based on this, it is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice, targeting a hold display corresponding to the look-ahead hold storage information. As the pre-reading effect, for example, an effect selected from a plurality of types of effects such as a pending change effect and a same-color design effect is executed. The pending change effect and the same-color design effect are effects that may be executed separately and simultaneously with pre-reading effects.

  In the hold change effect, the display mode (display color) of the hold display is changed at a predetermined timing (for example, at a predetermined timing such as the start of a variable display based on the hold storage information stored before the hold storage information). It is a production that changes. In the hold change effect, it is possible to change the color of the hold display of the target of the look-ahead effect to a different image color depending on the degree of expectation that the target will result in a big hit display. With the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation such as blue <green <red, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a big hit is made in a manner where the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of image color after the change.

  The same-color design effect is continued over a plurality of variable displays, and the stop symbols of the left, middle, and right effect designs are displayed as “blue design (left) -blue design (middle) -blue design (right)”, “ "Green design (left)-green design (middle)-green design (right)" or "red design (left)-red design (middle)-red design (right)" It is a production. In each of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, among the ten numeral symbols from "0" to "9", the even symbols are composed of blue symbols, and the odd symbols are "1" and "5". , "9" are green symbols, and "3" and "7" symbols are red symbols. As a result, the effect design can display any one of the same blue color design with a blue design, the same green design with a green design, and the same red design with a red design.

  In the same-color design effect, a stop symbol in the same-color design effect can be displayed in an image color in which the target of the look-ahead effect is different depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit display result. For example, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation to be a big hit in a mode in which the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of image color, based on the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation such as blue <green <red. The same color design effect that stops the blue same color design is called blue same color effect. The same-color design effect that stops the green same-color design is called green same-color effect. The same color design effect that stops the red same color design is called red same color effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the following combinations of the same color symbols can be displayed. As the blue same-color design, a combination of left, middle, and right effect designs of one type of the same-color design of "2, 4, 6" can be displayed. As the green same-color design, a combination of one type of same-color design in which the combination of left, middle, and right effect designs is "1, 5, 9" can be displayed. As the red same-color design, a combination of left, middle, and right effect designs of one type of the same color design of "3, 3, 7" can be displayed. For each of the same blue color design, the same green color design, and the same red color design, a combination of the same color design selected from a plurality of combinations of the same color design may be displayed.

  When the variable display is executed, at the start of the variable display, the jackpot determination result of the variable display is confirmed, and based on the big hit determination result, the active display corresponding to the variable display is performed at a predetermined timing (for example, An active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display can be executed at a predetermined timing (eg, at the start of each change of the initial change and the re-change of the pseudo series) in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo series.

  The active change effect can be executed at a predetermined rate when the change display of the pseudo-run change pattern is executed. In the variation display of the variation pattern of the pseudo-ream, the same color design effect that temporarily stops the same color design as the same color design effect executed in the pre-reading effect as a temporary stop symbol, and the character “NEXT” is drawn as the pseudo-strength exclusive symbol One of the NEXT symbol effects for temporarily stopping the selected symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a NEXT symbol) as a temporary stop symbol is selected and executed as a pseudo-sequence effect type.

  The hold image that appears and is displayed when new hold storage information is generated can perform a hold change effect of changing the display mode while the hold image is being displayed as the hold display. For an active image corresponding to the variable display based on the hold storage information, an active change effect that changes the display mode at the stage during the variable display can be executed.

  As the hold change effect for the hold image and the active change effect for the active change effect, an effect of changing the display mode by changing the color of the circular hold image can be executed. An image that appears and is displayed in a normal color (white) can be changed to a blue, green, or red image. The image appearing and displayed in blue can be changed to a green or red image. The image appearing and displayed in green can be changed to a red image.

  In this way, in each of the pending change effect and the active change effect, the change effect of the display mode is executed in a change mode in which the expectation of a big hit is increased. In addition, in the hold change effect, the change effect of the display mode may be executed in a change mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes low.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are executed only in the low base state, and the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are not executed in the high base state. Note that the prefetching effect and the active change effect may be executed even in the high base state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are executed only in the low base state, the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are executed targeting the hold display or the active display of the first hold memory. When the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are executed in the high base state, the look-ahead effect and the active change effect are executed with the hold display or the active display in the second hold memory as a target.

  Regarding the hold display, a hold change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes due to the hold change effect can be executed. Regarding the active display, an active change suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes due to the active change effect can be executed. As each of the pending change suggestion effect and the active change suggestion effect, a slot effect or an action effect is executed in the sub-effect display device 9B.

  In the slot effect, a specific symbol for indicating a change in the hold display or the active display is fluctuated for a predetermined period of time, and then the display result is derived and displayed, and the hold change effect or the active change is determined based on whether the display result is a specific display result. This is an effect indicating whether or not a change effect is to be executed.

  The action effect displays a specific character image for suggesting a change in the hold display or the active display, and whether the hold change effect or the active change effect is executed depending on whether the character image acts on the hold display or the active display. It is a production that suggests whether or not. As an effect in which the character image acts on the hold display or the active display, for example, an image in which the character image throws a ball toward the hold display or the active display is displayed on the sub-effect display device 9B, and accordingly, the main effect display device is displayed. In 9A, when the ball hits the hold display, an effect is executed in which the display mode of the hold display or the display mode of the active display changes. The effect in which the character image acts on the hold display may be any effect as long as the effect gives the player an impression that the hold display or the active display changes.

  When the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the suggestion effect by the slot effect or the action effect is executed once each time the hold display of the target of the look-ahead effect is shifted. When the active change suggestion effect is executed, when the change display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo run is executed, a slot effect or an action effect is performed once each time the first change and the re-change in the pseudo run are executed. Is performed.

  Next, an example of a look-ahead effect, a hold change suggestion effect, an active change effect, and an active change suggestion effect when the change display of the pseudo-run change pattern is executed will be described. FIG. 46 is a main effect display device 9 </ b> A and a sub effect display device showing an example of a look-ahead effect, a hold change suggestion effect, an active change effect, and an active change suggestion effect when a change display of a pseudo-run change pattern is executed. It is a display screen figure of 9B.

  In FIG. 46, (A) to (D) show the display screens of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B at the time of the prefetch effect, and (E) to (K) show the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-run. The display screens of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B at the time of the active change effect are shown. (H) and (I) of the active change effects in the pseudo-run change patterns shown in (E) to (K) show display screens during the same color pattern effect, and (J) and (K). , A display screen at the time of the NEXT symbol effect is shown.

  In FIG. 46, the display states of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B are shown as time elapses. In the main effect display device 9A, left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a hold display area 5H, a hold image H, and an active image AH are shown as display images. In the sub-effect display device 9B, a slot effect 99 of a slot effect is shown as a display image. In FIG. 46, the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are indicated by a downward arrow in a state in which the variation symbols are being displayed.

  Referring to FIG. 46, a first hold display area for displaying the first hold storage number by a hold image H and a second hold storage area by a hold image H are provided in the lower part of the display area of main effect display device 9A. A hold display area 5H including a second hold display area to be displayed is provided. An active display area AHA for displaying an active image AH is provided in a lower central area in the display area of the main effect display device 9A.

  In the hold display area 5H, the area on the left side of the active display area AHA is the first hold display area, and the area on the right side of the active display area AHA is the second hold display area. In the first hold display area, each time the first hold storage information increases, the hold images H are displayed in order from right to left in order from left to right each time the first hold storage information is consumed. A display is displayed in which the reserved images H are sequentially shifted rightward. In the second hold display area, each time the second hold storage information increases, the hold images H are displayed in order from left to right in order from left to right. A display in which the reserved images H are sequentially shifted to the left is displayed. In the hold display area 5H, a hold change effect in which the display color of the hold image H changes as described above may be executed.

  In the active display area AHA, an active image AH is displayed. In the active display area AHA, an active change effect in which the display color of the active image AH changes as described above may be executed.

  In FIG. 46 (A), at the start of the pending change suggestion effect of the look-ahead effect, the two reserved images H of the first reserved display based on the two pieces of the first reserved storage information are initially displayed in the reserved display area 5H, An example is shown in which the active image AH corresponding to the first hold display is displayed in the active display area AHA. The pending storage information corresponding to the older first pending image H of the two pending displays is the pending storage information of the target of the prefetch effect.

  As a pre-reading effect, a stage in which a hold change effect, a same color design effect, and a hold change suggestion effect by a slot effect are executed based on the target hold memory information, and the target hold image H becomes the first hold display. When the hold change effect is executed, the effect is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R based on the hold storage information immediately before the target hold storage information as shown in FIG. At the start of the effect symbol change display, a holding change suggestion effect by the slot effect is executed, and the slot symbol 99 starts the change display. After a lapse of a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46B, the change display of the slot symbol 99 ends, and the symbol “change” stops, and accordingly, the symbol “C” changes to FIG. As shown in (1), a hold change effect in which the color of the target hold image H changes (for example, changes from white to blue) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (C), after the color of the reserved image H of the target has changed, an image of “−” indicating that the slot effect has ended is displayed on the slot symbol 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (D), by performing the same color symbol effect, a blue same color symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, for example, a temporary stop symbol (actually, " Although a character indicating “color” is not displayed, a blue “2” symbol is indicated by “blue 2”, a blue “4” symbol is indicated by “blue 4”, and a blue “6” symbol to facilitate color identification. Is temporarily stopped and displayed as "blue 6").

  As shown in FIG. 46 (D), when the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information of the target on which the hold change effect and the same color symbol effect have been executed is executed, the change display based on the pseudo-run change pattern is executed, and the active change is performed. When the effect is selected to be performed, after the suspended image H of the target is moved and displayed in the active display area AHA as the active image AH corresponding to the variable display of the target, as shown in FIG. At the start of the display of the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the hold storage information, the slot effect 99 is changed by executing the hold change suggestion effect by the slot effect, as in the prefetch effect. Start display.

  After a lapse of a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the change display of the slot symbol 99 ends, and the symbol “change” stops, and accordingly, FIG. As shown in (2), an active change effect in which the color of the active image AH corresponding to the variable display of the target changes (for example, changes from blue to green) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (G), after the color of the active image AH corresponding to the variable display of the target has changed, an image of “−” indicating that the slot effect has ended is displayed on the slot symbol 99.

  When the same-color design effect is executed as a pseudo-sequence effect, as shown in FIG. 46H, the same-color design effect is executed, so that, for example, a blue same-color design is displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. A temporary stop is displayed as a temporary stop symbol to be displayed. Thereafter, when the re-variation display is executed, as shown in FIG. 46 (I), the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R start the re-variation display.

  On the other hand, when a NEXT symbol effect is performed as a pseudo-sequence effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (J), the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R have moved to the corners of the screen. Then, the effect of the NEXT symbol 94 is executed, so that the NEXT symbol 94 is temporarily stopped and displayed as a temporarily stopped symbol. Thereafter, when the re-variation display is executed, the effect symbols displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R start the re-variation display, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (I) or FIG. 46 (K), when the hold change suggestion effect by the slot effect is executed as the pseudo-sequence effect, at the start of each re-variation display of the pseudo-sequence, the same as in the pre-reading effect Then, the holding change suggestion effect by the slot effect is executed, and the slot symbol 99 starts to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time, the fluctuating display of the slot symbol 99 ends, and the effect corresponding to the display result is executed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 46 (D) and (H), the same-color design effect can be executed as a common effect in both the prefetching effect and the changing-time effect. As shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B) and FIGS. 46 (E), (F), (I) and (K), in the pre-reading effect, a hold change is performed to change the display mode for the hold display. An effect and an on-hold change suggestion effect corresponding to the on-hold change effect can be executed, and as an effect similar to those effects, an active change effect that changes the display mode for the active display in the change-time effect, An active change suggestion effect corresponding to the active change effect is executable.

  In this way, by enabling the same effect and the effect with relevance in the pre-reading effect and the effect at the time of change, the relevance is created between the pre-reading effect and the effect at the time of change, and the effect of the effect is interesting. Can be improved, and interest in these effects can be improved.

  The same-color design effect is executed as a pre-reading effect as shown in FIG. 46 (D), and the same-color design effect can be executed as a pseudo continuous effect as shown in FIG. 46 (H). Can be performed in a common production mode, so that a pseudo-continuous production is performed, and a pseudo-continuous production and a pre-reading are performed. By sharing the production with the production, the interest in these productions can be further improved.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a look-ahead effect presence / absence determination table and a look-ahead effect type selection table. The pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect (presence or absence). The look-ahead effect type selection table is a data table used for a lottery for selecting and determining an effect type when executing a look-ahead effect.

  The pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table includes a large hit pre-fetching effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 47A, a super-reach loss pre-fetching effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 47B, and a super-reach of FIG. Time look-ahead effect presence / absence determination table. In addition, a look-ahead effect type selection table shown in FIG. 47D is provided separately from these look-ahead effect presence / absence determination tables. The pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table and the pre-reading effect type selection table are stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12.

  The jackpot-based prefetching effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 47A is used at the time of a jackpot prediction in which the variable display result of the variable display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display serving as the target of the prefetch effect is expected to be the big hit display result. Can be The super-reach out-of-reach look-ahead effect presence / absence determination table in FIG. 47B shows that the super-reach predicted that the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display will be the deviation display result in the super-reach fluctuation pattern Used at the time of out-of-position prediction. The pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table other than the super reach in FIG. 47 (C) predicts that the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display will be the loss display result in the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach. Other than the super reach, which is used when predicting the deviation.

  In the look-ahead effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 47A to 47C, a random number SR2 (a numerical range of 0 to 99) for determining whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115. Are assigned to the decision to execute the look-ahead effect and the decision not to execute the look-ahead effect. As for SR2, the number of assigned random number SR2 values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  In the jackpot-based prefetching effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 47A, the prefetching effect is determined such that the magnitude of “execute the prefetching effect> does not execute the prefetching effect” is determined by the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute is selected is higher. In the super-reach out-of-reach look-ahead effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 47 (B), the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing makes a look-ahead relationship such that “execute look-ahead effect = do not execute a look-ahead effect”. The data is set so that the rate at which the decision to execute the effect is selected is equal to the rate at which the decision to not execute is selected. In the table for judging the presence or absence of a prefetch effect other than the super reach in FIG. 47 (C), the magnitude of “execute the prefetch effect <do not execute the prefetch effect” is determined by the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the ratio at which the decision not to execute the prefetch effect is selected is higher.

  By setting the data in FIGS. 47 (A) to 47 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display based on the hold storage information which is the target of the pre-reading effect becomes the big hit display result, the non-correction display result becomes As compared with, the ratio of determining to execute the prefetching effect increases. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit can be increased as compared to when the pre-reading effect is not executed. Further, by setting the data in FIGS. 47 (B) and 47 (C), the fluctuation display result of the fluctuation display based on the hold storage information which is the target of the pre-reading effect becomes an incorrect display result, but the expectation of a big hit is high. When the shift display result is obtained in the super reach, the expected degree of the big hit is lower than that in the super reach. When the shift display result is other than the super reach (for example, the normal reach change display, the normal change display, etc.), the shift display result is obtained. As compared with, the ratio of determining to execute the prefetching effect increases. Thereby, when the pre-reading effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit can be increased as compared to when the pre-reading effect is not executed.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, using all of the newly generated pending storage information as a determination target and using the look-ahead effect presence / absence determination tables in FIGS. 47 (A) to 47 (C). . In addition, among the newly generated pending storage information, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect only for the pending storage information in which the fluctuation display is performed in the fluctuation pattern type of the reach including the normal reach and the super reach. May be.

  The look-ahead effect type selection table in FIG. 47 (D) is used to select the effect type when executing the pre-fetch effect from a plurality of effect types.

  In the look-ahead effect type selection table of FIG. 47D, a total of 103 numerical values of SR3 (a numerical range of 0 to 102) for the look-ahead effect type selection as one of random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 Are assigned to a plurality of types of prefetching effect types. As for SR3, the number of allocated random number SR3 values is shown to clarify the explanation. Three types of pre-reading effects are provided to be selectable: a pre-reading effect of the same color design effect alone, a pre-reading effect of the holding change effect alone, and a combination of a pre-reading effect of the same color design effect + holding change effect. Among them, the effect of executing the hold change suggestion effect is added to the combination of the look-ahead effect of the same color design effect + hold change effect.

  The selection ratio of the look-ahead effect type in the look-ahead effect type selection table is set in a magnitude relationship of “same color design effect alone = hold change effect effect alone> combination of same color design effect + hold change effect (addition of effect of hold change suggestion)”. I have. Note that the selection ratio of the look-ahead effect type may be set by allocation other than such allocation.

  As shown in FIG. 47, as the pre-reading effect, a case where the same color design effect alone is executed, a case where the hold change effect alone is executed, and a combination of the same color design effect + a hold change effect (addition of a hold change suggestion effect) May be executed. Thereby, the variation of the look-ahead effect can be increased, and the interest of the effect can be improved.

  FIG. 48 is a look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table. The look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table selects and determines the same-color design effect pattern of the same-color design effect to be executed when “same color design effect” is selected and determined as the effect type of the look-ahead effect using the look-ahead effect type selection table. Is a table used for lottery. The look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12.

  In the look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table, a total of 108 numerical values of SR4 (a numerical range of 0 to 107) for the same-color design effect pattern selection as one of random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are read-ahead. When the big hit determination result is determined to be a big hit (when the big hit is determined in the figure), and when the big hit determination result of the prefetch is determined to be out (when the loss is determined in the figure), the same blue color effect, the same green color effect, Also, it is allocated to a plurality of types of effect patterns called red same color effect. As for SR4, the number of allocated random number SR4 values is shown to clarify the explanation.

  In the look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table of FIG. 48, the effect pattern selection ratio of the same-color design effect at the time of determining the jackpot is set in a magnitude relationship of “blue same-color effect <green same-color effect <red same-color effect”, and when the loss is determined. Are set in a magnitude relation of “blue same color effect> green same color effect> red same color effect”.

  With such a setting, when the same-color design effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state has a magnitude relationship of “blue same-color effect <green same-color effect <red same-color effect”. Therefore, when the same-color design effect is performed as a look-ahead effect, the player's expectation of the big hit game state can be made different according to the color type of the same-color design, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the hold change effect pattern selection table will be described. The hold change effect pattern selection table is used to select and determine an effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect when the hold change effect is selected as the prefetch effect using the look-ahead effect type selection table.

  As the hold change effect pattern selection table, a plurality of tables are provided for each value of the first hold storage number at the time when a new start winning is generated. A first hold change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to the case where the first hold storage number at the time when a new start winning is generated is four. A second holding change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to the case where the first holding storage number at the time when a new start winning is generated is three. A third hold change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to the case where the first hold storage number at the time when a new start winning is generated is two. These first to third pending change effect pattern selection tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing a first hold change effect pattern selection table. FIG. 50A is an explanatory diagram showing a second hold change effect pattern selection table. FIG. 50 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a third hold change effect pattern selection table.

  In each of the first to third hold change effect pattern selection tables, a total of 1710 numerical values of SR5 (numerical range of 0 to 1709) for hold change effect pattern selection are used when the pre-reading jackpot determination result is a big hit. (When the big hit is determined in the figure) and when the big hit determination result of the pre-read is determined to be out (when the out of the figure is determined), a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns set as selection targets are allocated. . As for SR5, the number of allocated random number SR5 values is shown for clarity of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the pending change effect pattern includes the effect type “white → blue change” in which the pending change effect color changes from white to blue, and “white, blue” changing from white or blue to green. The effect type is classified into a plurality of effect types such as an effect type of “blue → green change” and an effect type of “white, blue, green → red change” that changes from white, blue or green to red. For each of the blue change effect type, the green change effect type, and the red change effect type, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a plurality of types of hold change effect patterns are provided so as to be selectable.

  The hold change effect pattern is obtained when the hold display is shifted from the appearance of the hold display at the time of the start winning prize to the execution of the variable display based on the hold storage information previously stored (extended). This is an effect pattern in which the hold display color changes at the time of the first shift.

  In the first hold change effect pattern selection table in FIG. 49, as the hold change effect pattern, the hold display color when the hold display appears at the time of the start winning, the color when the first hold display shifts, and the second time , A hold display color at the time of shift of the hold display and a hold display color at the time of shift of the third hold display are shown. In the second hold change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 50 (A), the hold change effect pattern includes a hold display color when a hold display appears at the time of a winning start and a hold display color when the first hold display shifts. And a hold display color at the time of shifting the second hold display. In the third hold change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 50B, as the hold change effect pattern, the hold display color when the hold display appears at the time of the start winning and the hold display color when the first hold display shifts. Are shown.

  As an example, the hold change effect pattern of “white → white → white → blue” in the effect type of “white → blue change” in FIG. 49 is white when the hold display appears, and shifts the first hold display. This is an effect pattern in which the hour is white, the second hold display shift is white, and the third hold display shift is blue.

  In the first to third hold change effect pattern selection tables shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the selection ratio of the hold change effect type at the time of determining the big hit is “white → blue change <white, blue → green change <white, blue”. , Green → red change ”, and the selection ratio at the time of determining the loss is set in the magnitude relation“ white → blue change> white, blue → green change> white, blue, green → red change ”. I have.

  With such a setting, when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, the expectation degree controlled to the big hit gaming state is “white → blue change <white, blue → green change <white, blue, green → red change”. The relationship is large and small. Therefore, when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, the player's expectation of the big hit game state can be made different according to the type of the hold display color after the hold change, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

  In the first and second reserved change effect pattern selection tables shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, “white → blue change”, “white, blue → green change”, and “white, blue, green → red change” For each of them, the selection ratio of the pending change effect pattern at the time of determining the big hit is set to be higher as the execution timing of the pending change effect is earlier, that is, as the execution timing of the pending change effect is closer to the appearance of the pending display. ing. On the other hand, the selection ratio of the pending change effect pattern at the time of determining the loss is set to be opposite to the selection ratio of the pending change effect pattern at the time of determining the big hit.

  With such a setting, when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead effect, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation for the big hit game state different according to the execution timing of the hold change effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Can be improved.

  In addition, each of “white → blue change”, “white, blue → green change”, and “white, blue, green → red change” is determined when the selection ratio of the reserved change effect pattern at the time of determining the big hit is determined. May be set to be opposite to the relationship shown in FIGS. 49 and 50. In addition, for each of “white → blue change”, “white, blue → green change”, and “white, blue, green → red change”, the selection ratio of the pending change effect pattern is determined differently from the time of determining the big hit. The time may be set to be the same.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change suggestion effect pattern selection table. The hold change suggestion effect pattern selection table selects and determines the effect pattern of the hold change suggestion effect to be executed when “hold change suggestion effect” is selected and determined as the effect type of the look-ahead effect using the look-ahead effect type selection table. Is a table used for lottery. The pending change suggestion effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12.

  In the pending change suggestion effect pattern selection table, a total of 97 numerical values of SR6 (a numerical range from 0 to 96) for selecting a hold change suggestion effect pattern as one of random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are: It is assigned to multiple types of production patterns that suggest changes in suspension. For SR6, the number of allocated random number SR6 values is shown for clarity of explanation. As the effect pattern indicating the pending change, any one of the effect patterns of the slot effect described above and the effect pattern of the action effect can be selected.

  The slot effect executed as the pending change suggestion effect is represented by a slot symbol 99 as shown in FIGS. 46 (A) to (D) each time the variable display is executed, with “X” for suggesting the change of the pending display. This is an effect of deriving and displaying a display result after a plurality of types of specific symbols consisting of "changes" are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period, and when the hold display changes, the symbols of "change" are stopped and the hold display does not change At this time, the effect is executed in an effect pattern in which the symbol “x” is stopped. In other words, the stop of the symbol of "change" is a success mode of the pending change suggestion effect, and the stop of the symbol of "x" is a failure mode of the pending change suggestion effect. And (at least at the start of the effect), at least a part is executed in a common effect mode.

  The action effect executed as the hold change suggestion effect displays an image of a specific character for suggestion of change each time the change display is executed, and the hold change effect is determined based on whether the specific character image acts on the hold display. Is performed, and when the hold display changes, the specific character image acts on the changed hold display (success mode), and when the hold display does not change, the specific character image is displayed. An effect that does not affect the hold display is executed (failure mode). This pending change suggestion effect is also executed at least in part in the success mode and the failure mode (at least at the start of the effect) in a common effect mode.

  The selection ratio of the hold change suggestion effect pattern in the hold change suggestion effect pattern selection table is set in a magnitude relationship of “slot effect> action effect”. Note that the selection ratio of the pending change suggestion effect pattern may be set by an allocation having a different relationship from the above allocation (allocation with the opposite selection ratio, allocation with the same selection ratio).

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  The effect control flag setting unit responds to an effect operation state such as a display state of effect images on the screens of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A plurality of types of flags whose status can be updated are provided. The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the screens of the main effect display device 9A and the sub effect display device 9B. Have been. The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as a random counter that generates various random numbers such as SR1-1.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. In a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit, data constituting a start winning winning reception command buffer and an effect buffer is stored. The start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer are provided in two types, a first special symbol and a second special symbol.

  The start-up winning reception command buffers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are storage buffers for receiving commands received at the time of generation of each hold storage information for each special symbol. In the start winning reception command buffer for the first special symbol, the storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (for example, “4”) is provided. Is provided. An effect buffer is added to such a start prize receiving command buffer in a manner associated with each hold storage. The effect buffer includes storage areas corresponding to the columns of “pre-fetch effect determination”, “pre-fetch effect execution variation designation”, “same-color design effect condition designation”, “holding-like change effect condition designation”, and “hold-change suggestion effect condition designation”.

  Regarding the start winning reception command buffer, as the area for storing the command received at the time of the start winning, a "symbol specification" area for storing a symbol specification command, a "variation type" area for storing a fluctuation type command, and a start winning specification command. There is provided a “start winning prize designation” area for storing the command, and a “holding number specification” area for storing a command for designating the number of reserved storages.

  When the first start winning ball device 6A or the second starting winning ball device 6B receives a start winning, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a start winning designation command (first or second start winning designation command), and A command called a reserved storage number designation command (first or second reserved storage number designation command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the command in the order received at the time of the start winning, from the beginning of the free area of the receiving command buffer at the time of the start winning. As a result, when there is a start winning, the received command is stored in each of the “designation of symbols”, “variation type”, “designation of starting winnings”, and “designation of the number of retained storages”.

  The various data stored in the start winning reception command buffer and the corresponding effect buffer are stored in the first storage area (the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) every time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. After the stored one is read out for use in the effect of the variable display, it is deleted and the subsequent storage contents are shifted. In the state in which the variation display of the effect symbol is started in a state where the data is stored in the buffer numbers “1” and “2”, each data stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted after being read, Each data stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”.

  At the time of the first start winning and the second start winning, respectively, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the start winning designation command (first and second), and the number of retained storage designation command (first and second) are set. Commands are transmitted in order. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the start winning award designating command, and the retained storage number designating command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. You.

  In association with the data of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" in the receiving command buffer at the time of the start winning for the first special symbol, information for the effect of the look-ahead effect and the pseudo continuous effect as shown in FIG. 46 described above is stored. An effect buffer is provided as a storage area for performing the effect. For the second special symbol, in this embodiment, the look-ahead effect and the pseudo-sequence effect as shown in FIG. 46 are not executed, and therefore no effect buffer used for executing such an effect is provided. For the second special symbol, an effect buffer for executing the look-ahead effect and the pseudo consecutive effect as shown in FIG. 46 is provided, and the prefetch effect and the pseudo consecutive effect similar to the first special symbol are executed. Is also good.

  Regarding the first special symbol, based on predetermined data such as symbol designating information stored in the start winning reception command buffer, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs “prefetch effect determination” in a prefetch effect process described later. , The data of "specify pre-reading effect execution variation", the data of "specify the same color design effect mode", the data of "specify the pending change effect mode", and the data of "specify the pending change suggestion effect mode" at the time of the start winning. A data storage area of “pre-reading effect determination presence / absence” provided in the effecting buffer corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4” corresponding to the pending storage information in the reception command buffer, “pre-reading effect execution” Data storage area for “designation of fluctuation”, data storage area for “designation of same color design effect style”, data storage area for “designation of hold change effect style” , And it is stored in the data storage area of the "pending changes suggested representation embodiment designation".

  The data of “pre-reading effect determination presence / absence” is data indicating whether a pre-reading effect determination has been made (presence or absence). The data of “designation of variation of execution of pre-reading effect” is data indicating whether or not designated (determined) as a variable display when executing a pre-fetching effect. The data of “designation of the same color design effect mode” is data indicating whether or not the same color design effect is executed as the pre-reading effect and the effect status. The data of “designation of a hold change effect mode” is data indicating whether or not a hold change effect is executed as a prefetch effect and an effect mode. The data of “designation of a pending change suggestion effect mode” is data indicating whether or not a hold change suggestion effect is executed as an effect indicating a prefetch effect and an effect mode.

  Depending on whether or not it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching effect based on the prefetching effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 47 (A) to 47 (C) with respect to the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning. In the data storage area of “pre-reading effect judgment presence / absence”, data that can specify “no judgment” or “judgment” is stored.

  If it is determined that the prefetch effect is not to be performed on the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the effect buffer corresponding to the hold memory information corresponding to the new start winning is specified in the data storage area of "prefetch effect change execution designation". Is stored in the storage area of the data of "designation of pre-reading effect", and data capable of specifying "no effect" are stored.

  When it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed based on the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning and when the prefetching effect type is determined based on the prefetching effect type selection table in FIG. The data is stored in the following manner according to the type of prefetching effect.

  Based on the new hold storage information, the look-ahead effect type of the same-color design effect alone is selected, and when an effect pattern is selected from the same-color design effect patterns of FIG. 48, data is stored in the effect buffer as follows. Is done. In the effect buffer corresponding to each of all the on-hold storage information stored before the new on-hold storage information, data capable of specifying “specified” is stored in the data storage area of “specify prefetch effect execution variation”. In the storage area of the data of “same color design effect designation”, data capable of specifying an effect pattern selected from “blue same color effect”, “green same color effect”, and “red same color effect” is stored. You.

  As described above, when an effect pattern in which the same-color design effect is independently executed is selected based on the new hold storage information, all of the hold storage information stored before the new hold storage information corresponds. Based on the data in the data storage area of “specify pre-reading effect execution variation” and the data in the data storage area of “designation of same-color design effect mode”, when the variable display based on which suspended storage information is executed, The effect control microcomputer 115 can recognize whether the same color symbol effect of the effect pattern is executed.

  Based on the new hold storage information, when the prefetch effect type of the hold change effect alone is selected, and when an effect pattern is selected from the hold change effect patterns of FIGS. 49 and 50, it is based on the new hold storage information. With respect to the reserved image, the reserved image appears and displayed in the reserved appearance color specified by the selected effect pattern, and the data is stored in the effect buffer as follows.

  In the data of the effect buffer corresponding to the hold storage for executing the change display of the shift times at which the hold change specified by the selected effect pattern is executed, the data storage area of the data storage area of the "prefetch effect execution change designation" is displayed in the data storage area. Data that can specify “presence specified” is stored, and data that can specify the “pending change color” specified by the selected effect pattern is stored in the data storage area of “pending change production mode specification”.

  On the other hand, in the data of the effect buffer corresponding to the hold storage of the variable times in which the hold change specified in the selected effect pattern is not executed, “unspecified” is set to the data storage area of the data storage area of “prefetch effect execution change designation”. Specifiable data is stored, and data capable of specifying “unspecified” is stored in the data storage area of “designation of pending change effect mode”.

  As described above, when an effect pattern in which the hold change effect is executed is selected based on the new hold storage information, the “look-ahead” corresponding to all the hold storage information stored before the new hold storage information is selected. Based on the data in the data storage area of the effect execution change specification and the data in the data storage area of the hold change effect mode specification, the color of the hold image is displayed when the change display based on which hold storage information is executed. The effect control microcomputer 115 recognizes the effect of the effect of changing the color of the reserved image to the color of the reserved image when the variable display based on which reserved storage information is executed without any change. It becomes possible.

  Based on the new hold storage information, it is selected to execute a look-ahead effect type (holding change suggestion effect addition) based on a combination of the same color design effect and the hold change effect, and the effect pattern is selected from the same color design effect patterns of FIG. When the effect pattern is selected from the pending change effect patterns of FIGS. 49 and 50 and the effect pattern is selected from the pending change suggestive effect patterns of FIG. 51, the data is stored in the effect buffer as follows. Is stored.

  In the effect buffer corresponding to each of all the on-hold storage information stored before the new on-hold storage information, data capable of specifying “specified” is stored in the data storage area of “specify prefetch effect execution variation”. In the storage area of the data of “same color design effect designation”, data capable of specifying an effect pattern selected from “blue same color effect”, “green same color effect”, and “red same color effect” is stored. You.

  Further, with respect to the hold image based on the new hold storage information, the hold image appears and displayed in the hold appearance color specified by the effect pattern selected from the hold change effect patterns of FIGS. 49 and 50, as follows. The data is stored in the effect buffer. In the data of the effect buffer corresponding to the hold storage for executing the change display of the shift times at which the hold change specified by the selected effect pattern is executed, the data selected in the data storage area of “designation of hold change effect mode” is selected. Data that can specify the “pending change color” specified by the effect pattern is stored.

  Further, in order to execute the suggestion effect specified by the effect pattern selected from the hold change suggestion effect patterns of FIG. 51 based on the new hold storage information, data is stored in the effect buffer as follows. You. In the data of the effect buffer corresponding to the hold storage for executing the variation display of the shift times in which the hold change specified by the effect pattern selected from the hold change effect patterns is not executed, the data of "designation of the hold change suggestion effect mode" In the storage area, data that can specify the “suggested effect when no change in hold” specified by the selected pending change suggestion effect pattern is stored. In the data of the effect buffer corresponding to the hold memory performing the change display of the number of shifts in which the hold change specified by the effect pattern selected from the hold change effect patterns is executed, the "hold change suggestion effect mode designation" In the data storage area, data that can specify the “suggested effect when a change in suspension” specified by the selected pending change suggestive effect pattern is stored.

  In this manner, based on the new hold storage information, when the combination of the same color design effect and the hold change effect is executed, and the effect type for executing the hold change suggestion effect is selected, The data of the data storage area of “specify pre-reading effect execution variation”, the data of the data storage area of “design of same-color design effect mode”, and the data of “designation of hold change effect mode” corresponding to all the hold storage information stored in Based on the data in the storage area and the data in the data storage area of the “designation of change in hold suggestion effect”, when the variable display based on which hold storage information is executed, the same color design effect of the effect pattern and the change effect of hold change The effect control microcomputer 115 can recognize whether or not the effect of suggesting a pending change is executed.

  Based on the data of such an effect buffer, the effect control microcomputer 115 produces an effect pattern in which the same color design effect is executed alone, an effect pattern in which the hold change effect is executed alone, and the same color design effect + hold. It is possible to execute an effect with an effect pattern in which a pending change suggestion effect is executed in addition to the combination of change effects.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect processing (S700) described above. In the look-ahead effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs the following processing.

  First, in the effect buffer described above, it is confirmed whether or not data of “specify prefetch effect execution variation” is stored in the data storage area of “specify prefetch effect execution variation” corresponding to at least one hold storage state. Thus, it is determined whether or not it is during the scheduled execution period of the prefetch effect (S710). The execution scheduled period of the look-ahead effect refers to a period in which it is scheduled to execute a look-ahead effect such as the same-color design effect or the hold change effect described above, and includes a period in which the look-ahead effect is actually being executed. Refers to the period.

  If it is during the scheduled execution period of the prefetch effect in S710, the processing is ended to avoid the execution of the duplicate prefetch effect by not setting a new prefetch effect. On the other hand, if it is not in the scheduled execution period of the prefetch effect in S710, the process proceeds to S711 to enable setting of a new prefetch effect. In S711, the contents of the above-mentioned first hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer are checked, and in the first hold memory, it is not determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S711). For example, it is determined whether or not there is data in the reserved storage in which data that can specify “no determination” is stored in the data storage area of the presence / absence of the prefetching effect determination.

  If there is no first pending storage for which it is not determined whether or not to execute the prefetching effect in S711, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S711 that there is an undetermined first hold storage that has not been determined whether to execute the prefetch effect, the first hold storage number designation command determines whether the current number of first hold storage is two or more. (S712). In S712, when the first hold storage number is less than 2, there is no first hold storage information for performing the variable display before performing the variable display based on the new first hold storage information, and a new first hold is performed. Since there is no fluctuating display of the target for executing the prefetching effect for the reserved image among the prefetching effects based on the stored information, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display for executing the prefetching effect is executable.

  If the current first reserved storage number is not 2 or more in S712, it is determined that the prefetch effect is not to be executed (no prefetch effect) (S714), and the process proceeds to S719 described later. On the other hand, if the current number of first pending storages is 2 or more in S712, the first pending storages for which the determination as to whether or not to execute the prefetching effect determined in S711 has not been determined are stored in the start winning reception command buffer. The storage content of "designation of the symbol" is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first hold storage information to be prefetched is the one specifying the jackpot display result (S713).

  If it is determined in S713 that the jackpot display result has been designated, SR2 for prefetching effect determination is extracted, and a prefetching effect is executed using the jackpot-time prefetching effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is (S718). On the other hand, if it is determined in S713 that the jackpot display result has not been designated, the first hold storage in which the determination as to whether or not to execute the prefetching effect has not been determined in S711 is made in the start winning reception command buffer. By checking the storage content of "variation type" and determining whether or not the super-reach has been specified, the first hold storage information to be prefetched is specified as a variation type that results in a missed display result after a super-reach effect. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S715).

  If it is determined in S715 that the first hold storage information to be subjected to the prefetch determination specifies a variation type that results in a loss display after the super reach effect, SR2 for prefetch effect determination is extracted, and FIG. It is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is to be executed using the super-reach out-of-reach pre-reading effect presence / absence determination table of B) (S716).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S715 that the first hold storage information to be subjected to the pre-reading determination does not specify the fluctuation type that results in the loss display after the super-reach effect, SR2 for pre-reading effect determination is extracted, and FIG. It is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect using the prefetch effect effect presence / absence determination table other than the super reach of (C) (S717).

  After it is determined in S716, S717, or S718 whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, in the effect buffer described above, “prefetch effect determination presence / absence” corresponding to the first hold storage of the current prefetch determination target. Is stored in the data storage area of (a) (S718).

  Next, in S716, S717, or S718, it is determined whether or not it is determined (presence of execution) that a prefetch effect is to be performed on the first hold storage information to be prefetched (S720). If it is determined in S720 that the prefetch effect is not determined (no execution), the process proceeds to S729 described later. On the other hand, in S720, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is determined to be performed (execution is performed), the first hold storage information of the pre-reading determination target is determined to have a big hit based on the data in the “designation” area. In addition to checking the result of the pre-reading to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is determined, the SR 3 for pre-reading effect type determination is extracted, and the pre-reading effect type is selected and determined using the pre-reading effect type selection table of FIG. 47D (S721). . Thus, for the first hold storage information to be prefetched, the effect type of the look-ahead effect is the same color design effect alone, the hold change effect alone, or a combination of the same color design effect + the hold change effect (including the hold change suggestion effect). ) Is determined to be one of the production types.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the effect type of the look-ahead effect determined in S721 is the same color symbol effect alone (S722). When it is determined that the same-color design effect is solely determined in S722, the pre-read result of whether the hit is a big hit or not is confirmed for the first hold storage information of the pre-read determination target based on the data of the "designation designation" area. At the same time, the SR4 for selecting the same-color design effect pattern is extracted, the same-color design effect pattern is selected and determined using the look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table of FIG. 48, and data that can specify the determined same-color design effect pattern is obtained. The data is stored in the data storage area of “designation of same-color design effect mode” (S723). Next, the process proceeds to S729.

  In step S729, the new hold storage information is stored in the ROM 121 using the appearance hold color selection table that can be used to select and determine the hold color at the time of appearance of the hold storage display corresponding to the new hold storage information. Is selected and determined, and the process proceeds to S730. The appearance reserved color selection table is a data table for selecting a reserved color at the time of appearance of the reserved storage display from among white, blue, green, and red, and is one of random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115. The reserved color at the time of appearance is randomly selected and determined based on the value of SR14 for appearance reserved color selection. In the appearance reserved color selection table, the selection ratio of the reserved color is different depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display corresponding to the new reserved storage information is the big hit display result. For example, the selection ratio of the reserved color when the jackpot display result is obtained is set in a relation of “white <blue <green <red”, and the selection ratio of the reserved color when the loss display result is obtained is as follows. The relationship of the selection ratio “white> blue> green> red” is set.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in S722 that the same-color design effect alone is determined, it is confirmed whether or not the effect type of the look-ahead effect determined in S721 is the pending change effect alone (S724). If it is determined in S724 that the pending change effect is solely determined, in S725, the first look-ahead storage information to be prefetched is determined to be a big hit or a miss based on the data in the “designation” area based on the data in the “designation” area. The result is confirmed, and the first reserved storage number including the new reserved storage information is confirmed based on the data in the “designated reserved storage number” area. Then, it extracts SR5 for selection of the pending change effect pattern, selects and determines the pending change effect pattern using any one of the first to third pending change effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 49 and 50, and determines the determined pending state. Data that can specify the change effect pattern is stored in the data storage area of “designation of change effect state on hold” (S725). In S725, the hold color at the time of appearance of the hold display corresponding to the new hold storage information is also determined based on the determined hold change effect pattern. Next, the process proceeds to S730.

  On the other hand, when it is not determined in S724 that the pending change effect alone is determined, the effect type of the look-ahead effect determined in S721 is a combination of the same color design effect + the pending change effect (including the pending change suggesting effect) according to the elimination method. The production type. In this case, by executing the same processing as that of S723 described above, the same-color design effect pattern can be selected and determined using the look-ahead same-color design effect pattern selection table of FIG. 48, and the determined same-color design effect pattern can be specified. Important data is stored in the data storage area of "designation of same color design effect mode" (S726).

  Next, by executing the same processing as that of S725 described above, a change-of-hold effect pattern is selected and determined using any of the first to third hold-change effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. The data that can specify the held change effect pattern is stored in the data storage area of “designation of hold change effect mode” (S727).

  Next, with respect to the first hold storage information to be prefetched, SR6 for holding change suggestion effect pattern selection is extracted, and a hold change suggestion effect pattern is selected and determined using the hold change suggestion effect pattern selection table of FIG. Then, data that can specify the determined hold change suggestion effect pattern is stored in the data storage area of “designation of hold change suggestion effect mode” (S723). By executing the same processing as that of S725 described above, a pending change effect pattern is selected and determined using one of the first to third pending change effect pattern selection tables in FIG. 49 and FIG. Then, data that can specify the determined hold change effect pattern is stored in the data storage area of “designate hold change effect mode” (S728). Then, the process proceeds to S730.

  In S730, a display is made to cause the reserved image of the appearance reserved color determined in S725, S727, or S729 to appear as a new reserved image (S730), and the process ends. Each time the variable display is executed, the hold image displayed and displayed in this manner is subjected to a hold shift operation by the hold storage display control process of S707 in FIG. 45, and the display position is shifted (moved).

  As described above, in the pre-reading effect processing, when new hold storage information is generated in response to a new start winning, in addition to selecting and determining the appearance hold color, selection and determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect Related to the look-ahead effect such as the effect of the look-ahead effect (effect type, effect pattern, etc.) when the decision to execute the look-ahead effect is made, and the effect of the suggestive effect when the decision to execute the look-ahead effect is made The processing concerning various effects to be performed is performed.

  Note that, as described above, the processing of selecting and determining an appearance reserved color when new reserved storage information is generated in response to a new start winning is included in the reserved storage display control processing of S707 in FIG. It may be executed when the hold storage display control process is executed.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display result is determined to be out (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out is determined, for example, by whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received as the variation pattern command (S602).

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the display result of the non-reachable loss is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 121 (S604). , S616. In the lost symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is respectively set to the left and the middle using a lost symbol determination data table. , Is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in a variation display of the effect symbol on the right. In the case of determining the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols in this way, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of the big hit symbols, correction is made to be a combination of out-of-reach symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). When the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol by accident, the stop symbol is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols (for example, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol) and each stop symbol is corrected. Is determined.

  When it is determined that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern in the processing of S602 (when it is determined that the pattern is the reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of the reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using a lost symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number matching the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and is determined as a middle symbol. Also, in this case, if a combination of the big hits happens to occur, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the combination of the symbols (for example, correcting the middle symbol by shifting one symbol).

  Also, when it is not determined in the process of S601 that the difference is determined to be a deviation (when it is determined to be a big hit), the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect that forms a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of the big hit. A stop symbol of the symbol is determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616.

  In S603, the combination of winning symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result identification command storage area, the type of the jackpot from the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that it is determined to be a jackpot, a numerical data (random number) is extracted from the SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of the SR1-1 and the jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using the data table (table for determining the variable jackpot symbol determination) in which the relationship with the middle and right is set to the odd-numbered slot combination such as “7, 7, 7” etc. Is determined. Also, when it is determined that the normal jackpot has been determined, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and the normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle, Using a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the right-hand slot combination such as “4, 4, 4” is set on the right, the combination of any of the ordinary jackpot symbols from the extracted values Select and decide. The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, a process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the effect of the variable display of the effect symbol (including the variable display mode such as the pseudo-run) and the process of setting various effects such as the pre-reading effect) is performed. After performing the effect setting process to be performed (S616), the process proceeds to S617. The processing content of the effect setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and the various effect control (effect operations) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the processing of S616. Among the plurality of symbol variation control patterns stored in the above, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbols on the main effect display device 9A in the period from the start of the change of the effect symbols until the final effect symbol as the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating the control contents of various effecting operations such as the effect display operation in the fluctuation effect, the effect effect in the reach effect, the effect operation in the pseudo-sequence effect, and the effect effect in the preview effect are stored as a symbol effect control pattern. .

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and the end code, such as a variation display of the effect symbol It includes control data for controlling various kinds of effecting operations in accordance with the content of the effect control and the timing of switching the effect control, etc., in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  After performing the processing of S619, the effect devices (main effect display device 9A, various lamps, speaker 27, etc.) are operated in accordance with the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to cause the main effect display device 9A to display an image (including effect symbols) according to the variation pattern. A control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of a light emitting body such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect design variation process (S802). A symbol change start process is executed (S622).

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo consecutive effect type selection table, an active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection determination table, and an active change effect execution presence / absence selection determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12. The pseudo-sequence effect type selection table of FIG. 54A is a data table used for a lottery to select the effect type of the pseudo-sequence when performing the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-sequence.

  In the pseudo consecutive effect type selection table, a total of 101 numerical values of the pseudo consecutive effect type selection random number SR7 (a numerical range of 0 to 100) as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are changed. When the big hit determination result at the start is a big hit (when the big hit is determined in the figure) and when the pre-read big hit determination result is the wrong (when the loss is determined in the figure), the same color pattern effect and NEXT It is allocated to a plurality of types of pseudo-sequence productions called design effects. As for SR7, the number of allocated random numbers SR7 is shown to clarify the explanation.

  In the pseudo consecutive production type selection table of FIG. 54, the selection ratio of the pseudo consecutive production type at the time of determining the big hit is set in a magnitude relationship of “same color design effect> NEXT design effect”, and the selection ratio at the time of determining the loss is “same color”. The design effect is set in a magnitude relationship of “design effect <NEXT symbol effect”. With such a setting, when the pseudo continuous production is executed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state has a magnitude relationship of “same color design production> NEXT design production”. Therefore, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation for the big hit game state different according to the pseudo continuous production type when the variable display is executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Note that the relationship of the selection ratio between the time of determining the big hit and the time of determining the loss for the pseudo continuous production type may be set to be opposite to the relationship shown in FIG. Further, the selection ratio of the pseudo continuous production type may be set to be the same at the time of determining the big hit and at the time of determining the big hit, or may be set regardless of the fluctuation display result.

  The active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection table of FIG. 54 (B) is used for a lottery for determining whether to perform the active change suggestion effect (presence / absence) when performing the variation display of the pseudo-run variation pattern. It is a data table. In the active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection table, a total of 105 random numbers SR8 (numeric range of 0 to 104) for determining the presence / absence of active change suggestion effect execution as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are stored. The numerical value is divided into a case where the pseudo continuous production type is selected and determined to be the same color symbol production and a case where the pseudo continuous production type is selected and determined to be the NEXT symbol production. It is allocated to the decision not to perform the suggested production.

  In the active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection table, the selection ratio of the active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence at the time of selecting and determining the same color symbol effect is set in a magnitude relation of “execution> non-execution”, and when the NEXT symbol effect is selected and determined. Are set in a magnitude relationship of “execution <non-execution”.

  As a result, in the pseudo continuous effect, the degree of expectation that the active change suggestion effect is executed has a magnitude relationship of “when the same color symbol effect selection is determined> when the NEXT symbol effect selection is determined”. Therefore, the rate at which the active change suggestion effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of the pseudo continuous effect when the variable display is executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 54B, the execution ratio of the active change suggestion effect is different depending on the effect type of the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo consecutive effect as the special effect, so the pseudo consecutive effect is executed. Sometimes, depending on the type of pseudo-sequence production, the rate at which active change suggestion productions are executed is different, so that the pseudo continuous productions and active change suggestion productions are linked to enhance the interest in these productions. Can be.

  It should be noted that the relationship between the selection ratio of the execution / non-execution of the active change suggestion effect at the time of determining the same color symbol effect selection and the time of determining the NEXT symbol effect selection may be set to be opposite to the relationship illustrated in FIG. Good. Further, the selection ratio of the execution / non-execution of the active change suggestion effect may be set to be the same at the same color design effect selection decision time and the NEXT design effect selection decision time, and the same color design effect and the NEXT design effect may be set at the same rate. It may be set regardless of the selection.

  The active change effect execution presence / absence selection table of FIG. 54 (C) is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the active change effect when performing the pseudo display of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern. It is.

  In the active change effect execution presence / absence selection table, a total of 107 numerical values of the active change effect execution presence / absence determination random number SR9 (a numerical range of 0 to 106) as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are stored. When the pseudo continuous production type is selected and determined to be the same color design effect, and when the pseudo continuous production type is selected and determined to be the NEXT design effect, the determination to execute the active change production and the non-execution determination are made. Allocated.

  In the active change effect execution presence / absence selection table, the selection ratio of the active change effect execution presence / absence at the time of selecting and determining the same color symbol effect is set in a magnitude relation of “execution <non-execution”, and the active ratio at the time of selecting the NEXT symbol effect is determined. The selection ratio of the change effect execution presence / absence is set in a magnitude relationship of “execution> non-execution”.

  With this setting, the pseudo sequential effect has a magnitude relationship that the degree of expectation that the active change effect is executed is “when the same color symbol effect selection is determined <NEXT symbol effect selection is determined”. Therefore, the rate at which the active change effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of the pseudo consecutive effect when the variable display is executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (C), when the execution ratio of the active change effect is different depending on the effect type such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect, when the pseudo consecutive effect is executed, Depending on the type, the rate of change in the form of the active display after the active change suggestion effect has been executed is different. Interest can be improved.

  Note that the relationship between the selection ratio of the execution / non-execution of the active change effect at the time of the same color symbol effect selection determination and the time of the NEXT symbol effect selection determination may be set to be opposite to the relationship shown in FIG. . In addition, the selection ratio of the execution / non-execution of the active change effect may be set to be the same at the time of the same color design effect selection decision and the time of the NEXT design effect selection decision, and the same color design effect and the NEXT design effect may be selected. May be set regardless of.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo continuous color symbol effect pattern selection table. The same-color design effect pattern selection table is a pseudo-continuous same-color design to be executed when “same color design effect” is selected and determined as the effect type of the pseudo continuous effect using the pseudo consecutive effect type selection table of FIG. It is a table used for the lottery for selecting and determining the effect pattern of the effect. The pseudo continuous color symbol effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121.

  In the pseudo-continuous color design effect pattern selection table, a total of 102 numerical values of the same color design effect pattern selection random number SR10 (a numerical range of 0 to 101) as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are stored. For each type of execution history of the same color pattern effect pattern at the time of the pre-reading effect, when the big hit determination result at the start of the variable display is a big hit (when the big hit is determined in the figure), the big hit determination result at the start of the variable display is incorrect. (When the out-of-position is determined in the figure), a plurality of types of effect patterns of blue same color effect, green same color effect, and red same color effect are allocated. As for SR10, the number of allocated random number SR10 values is shown to clarify the explanation.

  In the pseudo consecutive same color symbol effect pattern selection table of FIG. 55, the execution history of the same color symbol effect pattern at the time of the pre-reading effect targeting the hold storage information for which the variable display is executed is "no same color symbol effect", "blue same color". Effect, green same-color effect, and red-same-color effect. “No same-color design effect” indicates a history in which the same-color design effect was not executed during the pre-reading effect. “Blue same color effect” indicates the history of execution of the same color effect at the time of the pre-reading effect. “Green same color effect” indicates a history of the same green color effect performed during the pre-reading effect. The “red same color effect” indicates a history of the execution of the same color red effect at the time of the pre-reading effect.

  In the pseudo continuous color pattern effect pattern selection table of FIG. 55, when the same color pattern effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “no same color effect” and “blue same color effect”, the same color pattern at the time of determining the big hit The effect pattern selection ratio of the effect is set in the magnitude relationship of “blue same color effect <green same color effect <red same color effect”, and the selection ratio at the time of the loss determination is “blue same color effect> green same color effect> red same color effect”. It is set in a size relationship.

  In the pseudo continuous color pattern effect pattern selection table of FIG. 55, when the same color pattern effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “green same color effect”, the effect pattern selection ratio of the same color pattern effect at the time of determining the big hit is “green same color”. The effect is set in a magnitude relationship of “effect <red same color effect”, and the selection ratio at the time of determination of the loss is set in a magnitude relationship of “green same color effect> red same color effect”. In the pseudo-same color design effect pattern selection table of FIG. 55, when the same color design effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “red same color effect”, only “red same color effect” is selected at the time of determining the big hit and the loss. Selection rate is set.

  With such a setting, when the same-color design effect is executed as a pseudo-sequence effect, the degree of expectation to be controlled in the big hit game state has a magnitude relationship of “blue same-color effect <green same-color effect <red same-color effect”. Therefore, when the same-color design effect is performed as a look-ahead effect, the player's expectation of the big hit game state can be made different according to the color type of the same-color design, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Also, when the same-color design effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “no same-color design effect” and “blue same-color effect”, all the same-color effects of blue, green, and red are set to be selectable. I have. When the same color design effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “green same color effect”, the same color effect of green and red is set to be selectable. When the same-color design effect pattern execution history at the time of the pre-reading effect is “red same-color effect”, only the red same-color effect is set to be selectable.

  Thereby, based on a certain hold storage information, after the same color design effect is executed at the time of the pre-reading effect, when the same color design effect is executed at the time of the pseudo display based on the hold storage information, the same color design effect is executed at the time of the prefetch effect. It becomes possible to execute the same color design effect of the big hit expectation degree or more in the same color design effect. Therefore, when shifting from the pre-reading effect to the pseudo-representation effect in the variable display, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from hitting the big hit from falling, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  According to the same-color design effect pattern history at the time of the look-ahead effect, such as the blue same-color effect, the green-same color effect, and the red-same color effect of FIG. Pseudo continuous production can be executed with the same color design production pattern. Pseudo continuous production is performed in the production mode of the degree of expectation higher than the expected degree in the production mode of the look ahead production performed before the variable display for executing the pseudo consecutive production in the same color pattern production in the common mode of the look ahead production. Since it is possible, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo continuous production is performed in the production mode of the degree of expectation higher than the expected level in the production mode of the look-ahead production, and the interest of the production can be improved.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an active change effect type selection table. The active change effect type selection table is used to display the active display when the active change effect is executed when it is determined to execute the active change effect using the active change effect execution presence / absence determination table of FIG. It is a table used for a lottery for selecting and determining a change effect type (color change pattern). The active change effect type selection table is stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12.

  In the active change effect type selection table, a total of 106 numerical values of the active change effect type random number SR11 (a numerical range of 0 to 105) as one of the random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are read ahead. When the big hit judgment result at the start of the fluctuation display is a big hit (at the time of the big hit decision in the figure) and when the big hit judgment result at the start of the fluctuation display is incorrect for each type of execution history of the holding effect at the time of the production (At the time of determination of out-of-position in the figure). As for SR11, the number of allocated random number SR11 values is shown to clarify the explanation.

  In the active change effect type selection table of FIG. 56, the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect targeting the hold storage information on which the change display is executed is “final hold color white”, “final hold color blue”, and It is divided into three types of histories of “final reserved color green”.

  “Last hold color white” indicates a history in which the hold change effect was not executed during the pre-reading effect and the final hold display immediately before the variable display was white. The “final pending color blue” is displayed in blue and the final change immediately before the change display depends on whether the pending change effect was not executed during the look-ahead effect or the hold change effect was executed during the look-ahead effect and changed to blue. The history in which the hold display was blue is shown. The “final hold color green” is displayed in green and the final change immediately before the change display depends on whether the hold change effect was not executed during the look-ahead effect and the hold change effect was executed during the pre-fetch effect and turned green. Indicates the history for which the hold display was green. When the final hold display immediately before the fluctuation display is red, it is impossible to perform an active change effect in a manner of increasing the expectation of a big hit, and therefore, it is not included in the type of the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect. Not.

  In the active change effect type selection table, when the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect is “final hold color white”, the change effect type of the active display is “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, and Either “white → red change” can be selected. When the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect is “final hold color white”, the change rate of the active display at the time of determining the big hit is “white → blue change <white → green change <white → red change”. The selection ratio at the time of determining the loss is set in the magnitude relationship of “white → blue change> white → green change> white → red change”.

  In the active change effect type selection table in FIG. 56, when the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect is “final hold color blue”, the change effect type of the active display is “blue → green change” and “blue → green change”. Any of "red change" can be selected. When the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect is “final hold color blue”, the change rate of the active display at the time of determining the big hit is determined by the magnitude relation of “blue → green change <blue → red change”. The selection ratio at the time of determining the loss is set in a magnitude relationship of “blue → green change> blue → red change”.

  In the active change effect type selection table, when the execution history of the hold effect at the time of the look-ahead effect is “final hold color green”, the change effect type of the active display is “green → red change” at the time of the jackpot determination and the loss determination. A selection ratio at which only the user can select is set.

  With such a setting, when the active change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of controlling the big hit game state by the color of the active display has a magnitude relationship of “blue <green <red”. Therefore, when the active change effect is executed, the player's expectation of the big hit game state can be changed according to the type of the color of the active display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, the active change effect pattern selection table will be described. The active change effect pattern selection table uses the active change effect execution presence / absence determination table of FIG. 54C to select an effect pattern (effect mode) of the active change when it is selected to execute the active change effect. Used to make decisions.

  As the active change effect pattern selection table, a plurality of tables are provided for each value of the number of times of pseudo-run change (total number of initial changes + re-changes) in the pseudo-run change display in which the active change effect is executed. A first active change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to a case where the number of times the pseudo run changes is four (four pseudo runs). A second active change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to a case where the number of times the pseudo run changes is three (three pseudo runs). A second active change effect pattern selection table is provided corresponding to the case where the number of pseudo run changes is two (two pseudo runs). These first to third active change effect pattern selection tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a first active change effect pattern selection table. FIG. 58A is an explanatory diagram showing a second active change effect pattern selection table. FIG. 58B is an explanatory diagram showing a third active change effect pattern selection table.

  In each of the first to third active change effect pattern selection tables, a total of 104 numerical values of SR12 (a numerical range of 0 to 103) for selecting an active change effect pattern are determined using the active change effect type selection table of FIG. For each type of change effect type of the active display determined in the above, when the big hit determination result at the start of the variable display is a big hit (at the time of determining the big hit in the figure), the big hit determination result at the start of the variable display is incorrect. Are assigned to a plurality of types of active change effect patterns set as selection targets. SR12 indicates the number of assigned random number SR12 values.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the active change effect patterns are “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, “white → red change”, and “blue → green change” according to the change effect type of the active display. , "Blue-to-red change", and "green-to-red change". Then, for each of “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, “white → red change”, “blue → green change”, “blue → red change”, and “green → red change”, As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, a plurality of types of active change effect patterns are provided so as to be selectable.

  The active change effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the active display color changes at the time of several changes when each re-change is performed in a table from the first change in a pseudo-run effect.

  In the first active change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 57, as the active change effect patterns, the active display color at the time of the first change, the active display color at the first change, and the active color at the second change The display color and the active display color at the time of the third re-variation are shown. In the second active change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 58 (A), as the active change effect patterns, the active display color at the time of the first change, the active display color at the first re-change, and the second re-change The active display color at the time is shown. In the third active change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 58 (B), an active display color at the time of the first change and an active display color at the time of the first re-change are shown as the active change effect patterns.

  As an example, the active change effect pattern of “white → white → white → blue” in the effect type of “white → blue change” in FIG. This is an effect pattern in which white, white at the first re-variation, white at the second re-variation, and blue at the third re-variation.

  In the first and second active change effect pattern selection tables shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, “white → red change”, “blue → green change”, “blue → green change” For each of the active change effect types of “blue → red change” and “green → red change”, the selection ratio of the active change effect pattern at the time of determining the jackpot is such that the earlier the execution timing of the active change effect, the more active It is set to be higher as the execution timing of the change effect is closer to the initial change of the pseudo run. On the other hand, the selection ratio of the active change effect pattern at the time of determining the loss is set to be opposite to the selection ratio of the active change effect pattern at the time of determining the big hit.

  With such a setting, when the active change effect is executed, the sense of expectation for the big hit game state of the player can be made different according to the execution timing of the active change effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be.

  In addition, for each of “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, “white → red change”, “blue → green change”, “blue → red change”, and “green → red change”, The relationship between the selection ratio of the active change effect pattern at the time of determining the big hit and the selection ratio of the active change effect pattern at the time of determining the deviation may be set to be opposite to the relationship shown in FIGS. 57 and 58. Also, for each of “white → blue change”, “white → green change”, “white → red change”, “blue → green change”, “blue → red change”, and “green → red change”, The selection ratio of the active change effect pattern may be set so as to be the same at the time of determining the big hit and at the time of determining the loss.

  As shown in FIG. 46, FIG. 49 to FIG. 50, and FIG. 56 to FIG. 58, the hold display and the active display can be changed stepwise such that the hold display changes and then the active display changes. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the stage at which the mode of the active display changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an active change suggestion effect pattern selection table. The active change suggestion effect pattern selection table is an effect pattern of an active change suggestion effect to be executed when it is determined to execute the active change suggestion effect using the active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence determination table of FIG. It is a table used for a lottery for selecting and determining. The active change suggestion effect pattern selection table is stored in the ROM 121 provided on the effect control board 12.

  In the active change suggestion effect pattern selection table, a total of 98 numerical values of SR13 (a numerical range of 0 to 97) for selecting an active change suggestion effect pattern as one of random numbers updated by the effect control microcomputer 115 are: Multiple types of active change suggestion effect patterns are allocated. As for SR13, the number of allocated random number SR13 values is shown to clarify the explanation. As the active change suggestion effect pattern, any one of a plurality of effect patterns of the above-described slot effect effect pattern and action effect effect pattern can be selected.

  The slot effect executed as the active change suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 46 (E) to (K) each time the fluctuation display (the initial fluctuation + the fluctuation display of the re-variation) is performed during the pseudo-reen effect. This is an effect in which, as the slot symbol 99, a plurality of types of specific symbols including "x" and "change" for indicating a change in the active display are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period, and then the display result is derived and displayed, and the active display changes. When the active display does not change, the effect is executed with the effect pattern of stopping the symbol of “change” and stopping the symbol of “x” when the active display does not change.

  The action effect executed as the active change suggestion effect displays an image of a specific character for change suggestion each time a variation display (first variation + re-variation variation display) is performed during the production of the pseudo ream. This is an effect suggesting whether or not the active change effect is executed based on whether or not the specific character image acts on the active display. When the active display changes, the specific character image acts on the active display, and the active display is performed. Does not change, an effect is executed in which the specific character image does not affect the active display. The specific character image displayed in the active change suggestion effect is a character having the same image as the specific character image displayed in the hold change suggestion effect. As the specific character image of the active change suggestion effect, a character image at least partially different from the specific character image displayed in the hold change suggestion effect may be used.

  The selection ratio of the active change suggestion effect pattern in the active change suggestion effect pattern selection table is set in a magnitude relationship of “slot effect> action effect”. It should be noted that the selection ratio of the active change suggestion effect pattern may be set by an allocation having a relationship different from such allocation (allocation with the opposite selection ratio, allocation with the same selection ratio).

  As shown in FIG. 59, among a plurality of types of active change suggestion effect patterns such as a slot effect and an action effect, the ratio of a specific active change suggestion effect pattern such as a slot effect and an effect effect is the same color pattern effect and a NEXT pattern. Since it is different depending on the type of the effect of the pseudo continuous effect such as the effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect type of the pseudo continuous effect.

  FIGS. 46 (A) to (D) and FIG. 51 show the pending change suggestion effect patterns at the time of the prefetch effect, and FIGS. 46 (E) to (I) and FIG. As described above, since it is possible to execute the active change suggestion effect at the time of the pseudo continuous production in a mode in which the hold change suggestion production at the time of the pre-reading production is taken over, the prefetching production and the pseudo continuous production can be a series of production modes, It is possible to improve the interest in directing.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the above-described effect setting processing (S616). In the effect setting process, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs the process described below.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display in which the execution of the prefetch effect is specified (S630). Specifically, in S630, in the effect buffer for the first hold storage described above, the data of “designated” is stored as the “pre-reading effect execution change designation” data corresponding to the hold storage information for executing the current change display. When stored, it is determined that the display is a variable display in which the execution of the prefetch effect is specified. In S630, when it is determined that the display is not the variable display in which the execution of the prefetch effect is specified, the process proceeds to S631 described later.

  If it is determined in S630 that the variation display has been designated to execute the prefetch effect, the “same color” corresponding to the pending storage information for performing the current variation display in the effect buffer for the first suspension storage described above. Based on the setting data of the effect related to the look-ahead effect such as the data of the design effect design data, the data of the hold change effect condition design, and the data of the effect change effect effect design, the same color design effect or A look-ahead effect such as a hold change effect, and an effect related to a look-ahead effect such as a hold change suggestive effect are set (data set) as an effect mode to be executed as an effect related to the look-ahead effect (S632). ). In S632, when executing the effect pattern of the same color design effect, in order to make the stop design a combination of the same color stop design according to the color of the same color design effect, the stop design is determined by the stop design determined in S604 in FIG. In place of the above, a process of setting the combination of the same-color effect symbols selected and determined as the stop symbol at the time of the variable display is also performed by the method described above.

  By setting the look-ahead effect mode and the effect mode of suggesting a pending change in S632, when the variable display is executed in S802, for example, a look-ahead effect or the like as shown in FIGS. Will be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S630 that the fluctuation display is not the fluctuation display specified to execute the pre-reading effect, based on confirming the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command received at the start of the current fluctuation display, It is confirmed whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation pattern of a pseudo run (S631).

  If it is determined in S631 that the current fluctuation display is not a pseudo-run fluctuation pattern, the flow proceeds to S647. On the other hand, if the current fluctuation display is a pseudo-run fluctuation pattern in S631, whether a big hit will occur based on confirming the fluctuation display result specified by the display result designation command received at the start of the current fluctuation display. While confirming whether or not it is out, a random number SR7 for pseudo continuous production type selection is extracted, and the pseudo consecutive production type is set to the same color pattern production by using the pseudo continuous production type selection table of FIG. NEXT design effect is selected and determined, and data capable of specifying the selected and determined effect type is stored in the pseudo continuous effect type storage area provided in the RAM 122 (S633). Next, based on the data stored as the final reserved color data in the final reserved color storage area of the RAM 102 at the timing before the start of the current variable display, the last color of the reserved display color before the start of the current variable display is displayed. It is determined whether or not the final reserved color is other than “red” (S634).

  When the final reserved color is other than “red” in S634, based on the confirmation result of the selection of the pseudo consecutive production type in S633, the current pseudo consecutive production type is the same color pattern production and the NEXT pattern production. While confirming either of them, a random number SR8 for determining whether or not to perform an active change suggestion effect is extracted, and the presence or absence of an active change suggestion effect is determined using the active change suggestion effect execution presence / absence selection table of FIG. (S635).

  Next, based on confirming the result of the selection decision of the pseudo consecutive production type in S633, whether the current pseudo consecutive production type is the same color symbol production or the NEXT symbol production is determined, and whether or not the active change production is performed. The random number SR9 for determination is extracted, and the presence or absence of the execution of the active change effect is determined using the active change effect execution presence / absence selection table of FIG. 54 (C) (S636), and the process proceeds to S637. If the last reserved color is "red" in S634, the process proceeds directly to S637.

  In S637, it is determined whether or not the same color design effect has been determined based on the result of the selection determination of the pseudo consecutive effect type in S633 (S637). When the same color design effect is determined in S637, using the pseudo continuous color design effect pattern selection table of FIG. 55, the effect pattern of the same color design effect to be executed during the pseudo continuous effect is selected and determined. The data that can specify the pattern is stored in the pseudo continuous color symbol effect pattern storage area of the RAM 102 (S638). In S638, in order to execute the effect pattern of the same color design effect, the combination of the temporary stop symbols according to the color of the same color design effect is also determined by the method described above. Then, the process proceeds to S639. On the other hand, when it is not determined in S637 that the same color symbol effect is to be produced, the process directly proceeds to S639.

  Specifically, in S638, the same-color design effect pattern history is stored in the RAM 102, and the same-color design effect pattern history is stored at the time of the prefetch effect at the time of the prefetch effect before performing the variable display. Based on the stored data in the storage area, it is checked which of the histories shown in the look-ahead effect same-color design effect pattern history column in the look-ahead effect same-color design effect pattern history column of FIG. Based on the confirmation of the variable display result specified by the display result designation command received at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big hit or a loss will occur. Then, in S638, a random number SR10 for selecting the same-color design effect pattern is extracted, and based on the extracted value, the confirmed same-color design effect pattern history at the time of the prefetching effect, and the confirmed variable display result, the pseudo serial connection of FIG. Using the color design effect pattern selection table, the effect pattern of the pseudo continuous color design effect is selected and determined.

  In S639, it is confirmed whether or not the NEXT symbol effect has been determined based on the result of the selection determination of the pseudo consecutive effect type in S633 (S639). When the NEXT symbol effect is determined in S633, the NEXT symbol effect effect pattern for temporarily stopping the NEXT symbol as the temporary stop symbol is selected and determined, and is stored in the pseudo consecutive NEXT symbol effect pattern storage area of the RAM 102 (S640). . Then, the process proceeds to S641. On the other hand, when the NEXT symbol effect has not been determined in S639, the process directly proceeds to S641.

  In S641, it is checked whether or not the execution of the active change effect has been determined based on the result of the execution determination of the active change effect in S636 (S641). When it is determined in S641 that the active change effect is to be executed, the effect type of the active change effect to be executed during the pseudo continuous effect is selected and determined using the active change effect type selection table in FIG. 56 and determined. The data that can specify the effect type is stored in the active change effect type storage area of the RAM 102 (S642).

  Specifically, in step S642, based on the data stored as the final reserved color data in the final reserved color storage area of the RAM 102 at the timing before the start of the current variable display, the reserved display color before the start of the current variable display is displayed. The final reserved color, which is the final color, is confirmed, and based on the confirmation of the variable display result specified by the display result designation command received at the start of the current variable display, it is determined whether a big hit or a loss occurs. Confirm. In S642, a random number SR11 for selecting an active change effect type is extracted, and based on the extracted value, the confirmed final reserved color, and the confirmed variable display result, the active change effect type selection table of FIG. The effect type is selected and determined.

  Next, in S643, an active change effect pattern is selected and determined using any one of the first to third active change effect pattern selection tables of FIGS. 57 and 58, and the data that can specify the determined active change effect pattern is determined. Is stored in the active change effect type pattern storage area of the RAM 102 (S643), and the process proceeds to S644. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the active change effect in S641, the process directly proceeds to S644.

  In S644, it is determined whether or not the execution of the active change suggestion effect has been determined based on the result of the determination whether to execute the active change suggestion effect in S635 (S644). When it is determined in S644 that the active change suggestion effect is to be executed, the active change effect effect pattern to be executed during the pseudo-serial effect is selected and determined using the active change suggestion effect pattern selection table of FIG. Data that can specify the determined effect pattern is stored in the active change effect pattern storage area of the RAM 102 (S645). Then, the process proceeds to S646.

  Specifically, in S645, the pseudo continuous production type is confirmed based on the data determined in S633 and stored in the pseudo continuous production type storage area, and an SR13 for selecting an active change suggestion production pattern is extracted. Based on the confirmed pseudo-sequence effect type, the effect pattern of the active change suggestion effect is selected and determined using the active change suggestion effect pattern selection table of FIG.

  In S646, when it is determined in S631 that the fluctuation display of this time is the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo run, the NEXT symbol effect, the same color design effect, the active change effect, and the active change executable during the fluctuation display of the pseudo run. Based on the data stored in S638, S640, S642, S643, S645, and the like as the selection decision result regarding the change suggestion effect, the effect mode of the effect executed in the pseudo run in the current fluctuation display is set (S646).

  By setting an active display effect mode and an active change suggestion effect mode in S646, when the variable display is executed in S802, for example, an active display effect as shown in FIGS. Are executed. Next, in S647, a process of setting various other effects other than the pre-reading effect and the pseudo-sequence effect described above is executed (S647). After that, the effect setting process ends.

  Based on the setting of the effect control based on the execution of such effect setting processing, the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S802) shown in FIG. In a predetermined effect period, a look-ahead effect such as a same-color design effect and a hold change effect, and a hold change suggestion effect executed along with the hold change effect are executed. Further, based on the setting of the effect control based on the execution of such effect setting processing, the variation start process (S802) shown in FIG. 45 starts the change based on the effect mode set in S646. In a specific effect period at the beginning, a NEXT symbol effect, a pseudo-continuous effect such as a same-color effect effect, an active change effect, and an active change suggestion effect performed along with the active change effect are performed. Becomes

[Third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, an example will be described in which a part of the effect mode after the end of the pseudo continuous production is changed depending on the type of the pseudo continuous production.

  For example, in the case where one of the same color design effect and the NEXT design effect is executed as the pseudo consecutive effect, for example, when the same color design effect is executed as the pseudo consecutive effect, the pre-reading before the pseudo consecutive effect is performed. In the effect, when the same-color design effect is executed, the same-color design effect is executed as a subsequent pseudo-sequence effect, and in a state such as reach fluctuation after the end of the pseudo-sequence effect, the same color as the same-color design effect in the look-ahead effect An effect control for displaying a color effect image in the center of the screen is performed. On the other hand, when the NEXT symbol production is performed as the pseudo consecutive production, in the look-ahead production before the pseudo consecutive production, when the same color symbol production is performed, the NEXT symbol production is performed as the subsequent pseudo consecutive production, In a state such as a reach fluctuation after the end of the pseudo continuous effect, effect control is performed to display an effect image of the same color as the color of the same color design effect in the pre-reading effect in the corner of the screen. As a pseudo consecutive production, when a story pseudo continuous production in which a specific story is developed is executable, in a look-ahead production before the pseudo consecutive production, when the same color pattern production is executed, as a subsequent pseudo consecutive production A story pseudo continuous production is executed, and in a state such as a reach fluctuation after the end of the pseudo continuous production, an effect control for displaying an effect image of the same color as the color of the same color design production in the pre-reading production on the entire screen is performed.

  By performing such a production control, it is possible to make a part of the production mode after the pseudo consecutive production different depending on the type of the pseudo consecutive production, so that the production effect by the pseudo consecutive production can be further enhanced. .

  In addition, as an example of changing a part of the production mode after the pseudo continuous production depending on the type of the pseudo continuous production, the effect image is not limited to being different after the pseudo continuous production is completed. By changing the background image to be displayed, or changing the character image to be displayed after the end of the pseudo-sequence production, or by changing other images, a part of the production mode after the end of the pseudo-sequence production is made different. You may.

  In addition, examples of making a part of the production mode after the pseudo continuous production depending on the type of the pseudo continuous production are limited to an example of displaying an image having a relationship with the pre-reading production before the execution of the pseudo consecutive production. Instead, an image having no relation to the look-ahead effect before the execution of the pseudo continuous effect may be displayed.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, an example will be described in which the type of the change effect is different between when the mode of the hold display is changed and when the mode of the change corresponding display is changed. In the fourth embodiment, an action effect selected from a plurality of types of effect effects is used as the pending change effect and the active change effect. The effect control CPU 120 differs in the selection ratio of the action effect between the hold change effect and the active change effect.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the effect effect determination table, and determines the type of the effect effect. The “effect effect” is an effect that is executed in a manner that acts on the hold display or the active display in some form when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes. It can be suggested that the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the action effect determination table. Among them, FIG. 61A shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for the super shortened fluctuation (fluctuation time: 2.0 seconds). FIG. 61 (B) shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for shortened fluctuation (variation time of 8.0 seconds). FIG. 61 (C) shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for normal fluctuation (fluctuation time 12.0 seconds). Further, FIG. 61 (D) shows a specific example of the action effect determination table for changing the active display. As shown in FIG. 61, in this embodiment, the action effect determination table includes “change at shift”, “lightning effect effect”, “gear effect effect”, “character effect effect A”, “hold change symbol”. Determination values are assigned to “effect effect”, “character effect effect B”, and “change after reach”.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the period during which the action effect is executed is largely divided into a start time of change, a middle change period, and a late change period, and the type of action effect that can be performed differs depending on which period. As shown in FIG. 61, there are “change at shift” and “lightning action effect” as action effects that can be executed at the start of the change, and “effect actor effect” and “character effect effect” as the action effects that can be executed in the middle period of the change. "A", and the effect effects that can be executed in the latter half of the fluctuation include "hold change symbol effect effect", "character effect effect B", and "change after reach" (however, "change after reach" will be described later). This can be executed only when the display mode of the active display is changed.)

  The “at the start of fluctuation” refers to, for example, a period from the start of the fluctuation display until a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) elapses, or a period from the start of the fluctuation display to the transition to the high-speed fluctuation. Any format may be used as long as it can recognize that the period is from the start of the variable display to immediately after. In addition, the “middle period of fluctuation” refers to a period from the end of the period at the start of fluctuation to, for example, a predetermined period before the end of fluctuation (for example, 10 seconds) or the first effect symbol (for example, left symbol). Any period may be used as long as it can be recognized as a middle period of the variable display in some form, such as a period until the stop display is performed, a period until the reach occurs, or the like. In addition, the “second period of change” refers to, for example, a period from a predetermined period before the end of the change (for example, 10 seconds) to the end of the change display, or the first effect symbol (for example, the left symbol) is stopped and displayed. From the time until the end of the variable display, the period from the occurrence of reach to the end of the variable display, etc., which can be recognized in some form as the period after the variable display or the period immediately before the end Should be fine.

  In addition, when an effect pattern that displays the hold display of the notice object in a manner imitating a treasure box is used, the “treasure box opening effect effect” is executed as it is in the change display of the notice object, and the display form of the active display is changed. Thus, although not included in the action effect determination table shown in FIG. 61, the “treasure box opening action effect” is classified into the action effect executed at the start of the change.

  The “change at shift” is to change the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target immediately at the timing of the shift of the hold display (start of the variable display) without execution of the action effect (accordingly, , "Change during shift" is not strictly included in the action effect.) Further, the “lightning action effect” refers to executing an action effect such as a lightning strike on the hold display or the active display of the notice target on the main effect display device 9A, and changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target. To change it. Further, the “effect effect effect” is to execute an effect effect such that the movable member is movable to change the display mode of the suspension display or the active display of the notice target. The “character effect effect A” is an effect effect in which the character A acts on the hold display of the notice target on the main effect display device 9A to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target. Things. In addition, the “hold change symbol effect effect” means that an effect effect of temporarily stopping and displaying a hold change symbol indicating that the hold display of the notification target changes on the main effect display device 9A is executed. This is to change the display mode of the target hold display. The “character effect effect B” is an effect effect in which the character B acts on the hold display of the notice target on the main effect display device 9A to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target. Things. Further, the "change after reach" is to change the display mode of the active display at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the reach (for example, after 5 seconds have elapsed from the occurrence of the reach) without performing the action effect ( Therefore, the “change after reach” is not strictly included in the action effect.)

  The effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the start winning time determination result is a super-reach loss or a super-reach big hit, and is allocated according to the specified winning time determination result using the action effect determination table. The type of action effect is determined based on the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), in the case of using the action effect determination table for the super shortened fluctuation (fluctuation time 2.0 seconds), whether the prize-winning determination result is a super-reach loss or a super-reach big hit is obtained. Irrespective of the above, the “change at shift” at the start of the change is determined with 100% probability. That is, in the fluctuation display of the super shortened fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is extremely short and the production period of the action effect can hardly be secured, the display mode of the suspension display to be notified is controlled immediately at the timing of the shift of the suspension display.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C), an action effect determination table for shortened variation (variation time 8.0 seconds) and an effect effect determination table for normal variation (variation time 12.5 seconds) are provided. When used, "change at shift" and "lightning action effect" at the start of the change, "character effect effect" and "character effect effect A" in the middle period of the change, "hold change pattern effect effect" and " Character effect effect B ". As shown in FIGS. 61 (B) and (C), when the super-reach hits, the “retentive change symbol effect effect” and the “character effect effect B” in the latter half of the fluctuation are compared with the case where the super reach is lost. Are more likely to be determined. Conversely, when a super-reach hit occurs, the ratio of “change at shift” and “lightning-stroke effect” at the start of fluctuation is lower than in the case of super-reach loss. . Therefore, the determination value is assigned to the action effect determination table such that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the action effect is executed and the hold display changes in the latter half of the variable display. The present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, when the action effect is executed at the start of the change or in the middle of the change and the display on hold is changed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is increased. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the action effect determination table for the normal variation (variation time 12.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 61 (C), the action effect determination table for the shortened variation (variation time 8.0 seconds) shown in FIG. 61 (B) As compared with, the ratio of the “suspended change symbol effect effect” and the “character effect effect B” determined in the latter period of the change is higher. Conversely, in the action effect determination table for the normal variation (fluctuation time 12.5 seconds) shown in FIG. 61 (C), the action for the shortened variation (fluctuation time 8.0 seconds) shown in FIG. 61 (B). Compared with the effect determination table, the ratio at which the “change at shift” and the “lightning effect effect” at the start of the change are lower. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the rate at which the action effect is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation display and the hold display is changed becomes higher. In addition, as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the rate at which the action effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation or in the middle period of the fluctuation and the suspended display is changed may be increased.

  If there is a change in the active display in the variable display started this time, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the effect display determination table for changing the active display, and determines the type of the effect effect. The effect control CPU 120 specifies whether the display result is a miss or a big hit based on the display result designation command stored in the display result command storage area, and uses the effect effect determination table for changing the active display. Then, the type of action effect is determined based on the determination value assigned according to the specified display result.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (D), when the action effect determination table for changing the active display is used, “change at shift” and “lightning effect effect” at the start of the change, and “gear effect effect” at the middle of the change. , Or “post-reach change” in the later period of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 61 (D), in the case of a big hit, as compared with the case of a loss, the ratio at which the “actor action effect” in the middle period of fluctuation and the “change after reach” in the latter period of fluctuation are determined. Is getting higher. Conversely, when a big hit occurs, the rate at which the "change at shift" and the "lightning action effect" at the start of the change are lower than in the case of a loss. Therefore, the determination value is assigned to the action effect determination table so that the expectation (reliability) for the big hit increases as the action effect is executed and the active display changes in the latter half of the variable display. Note that, when the action effect is executed at the start of the change or in the middle period of the change and the active display changes, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), when the action effect determination table for changing the active display is used, the sum of the ratios determined as “change at shift” and “lightning action effect” at the start of the change is 30% + 30% = 60% in the case of a loss and 20% + 20% = 40% in the case of a big hit, which are relatively high. This is because the super-reach is lost or the super-reach hits in the variable display of the announcement target of the reservation or other announcement effect, so if the effect effect is executed after the occurrence of the reach or during the execution of the super-reach effect, the effect becomes rather troublesome. . For this reason, with respect to the variable display to be notified, the action effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation to increase the ratio of changing the active display. Further, even when the active display is changed in the middle period or the second period of the fluctuation, the “main-effect display effect” that does not involve the display in the main effect display device 9A, or the active display is changed strictly without the display effect “ Only the “change after reach” is executable.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, a display mode of a reserved display of a notice target such as “change at shift” at the start of a change or “lightning effect effect” and “middle-effect effect effect” at a middle period of change. There is a change mode that can be executed in common when the display mode is changed and when the display mode of the active display is changed. In addition, it can be executed only when the display mode of the suspension display of the notice target is changed, such as “character effect effect A” in the middle period of the change and “hold change design effect effect” or “character effect effect B” in the latter period of the change. There are variations. Further, there is a change mode that can be executed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, such as “change after reach” in the latter period of fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, the action effect determination table for determining the action effect when changing the hold display shown in FIGS. 61A to 61C and the active display shown in FIG. 61D are changed. In the action effect determination table for determining the action effect at the time of making, the case where the allocation of the determination values is made different according to the winning determination result and the display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, the action effect may be determined by allocating different determination values depending on how many stages the hold display and the active display have changed through the notification effect such as the hold.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display mode of the hold display and the active display always changes when the action effect is executed is described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the hold display is performed even when the action effect is executed. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the active display does not change (the so-called gaseous action effect is executed).

  Further, as described above, when the so-called gaseous action effect is configured to be executable, the degree of expectation that the hold display or the active display changes according to the type of the action effect differs (in other words, the ratio of the gaseous action effect differs). ). In this case, for example, when the character effect effect A is executed, the degree of expectation that the hold display changes is higher than when the character effect effect A is executed (in other words, the character effect effect A has a higher (The ratio of the action effect of the gasket is higher than the effect effect of the object). Further, for example, when the action effect in the latter period of the change is executed, the degree of expectation that the hold display or the active display changes is higher than when the action effect is performed at the start of the change or in the middle stage of the change ( In other words, the action effect in the latter stage of the fluctuation may have a lower ratio of the gaseous effect effect).

  Next, the execution timing of the action effect shown in FIG. 61 will be described. 62 and 63 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing of the action effect shown in FIG. 61. FIG. 62 shows the execution timing of the action effect executed in the variable display prior to the variable display of the notification target. FIG. 63 shows the execution timing of the action effect executed in the variable display of the notice target.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the notice target, “change at shift”, “lightning effect effect”, “gear effect effect”, “character effect effect A”, “hold change” By executing “symbol effect effect” or “character effect effect B”, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target. As shown in FIG. 62, in the case of the “change at shift”, the display of the hold display to be notified is immediately performed at the timing of the shift of the hold display (start of the fluctuation display) without strictly accompanying the execution of the action effect. The mode changes (classified at the start of the change). In the case of the “lightning action effect”, the lightning action effect is executed during the period at the start of the change, and the display mode of the suspension display of the notice target changes.

  Further, in the case of the "casing effect effect", the causal effect effect is executed during the middle period of the change, and the display mode of the suspension display of the notice target changes. In the case of “character effect effect A”, the character effect effect A is executed during the middle period of the change, and the display mode of the pending display of the notice target changes. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, even if the action effect is performed during the same middle period of the fluctuation, the “character effect effect” is executed earlier than the “character effect effect A”. It is a production effect. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and if it is an action effect performed in the same middle period, for example, the “effect effect effect” and the “character effect effect A” may be completely different from each other. The effect timing may be configured to be the same, or the effect period may be configured to be partially common.

  In the case of the “hold change symbol effect effect”, the hold change symbol effect effect is executed in the latter period of the change, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target changes. In the case of “character effect effect B”, the character effect effect B is executed during the latter period of the change, and the display mode of the pending display of the notice target changes. As shown in FIG. 62, even in the action effect performed in the latter period of the same fluctuation, the “character effect effect B” is an effect effect executed at a timing earlier than the “hold change symbol effect effect”. is there. In addition, as long as the action effect is performed in the same period of the latter half of the fluctuation, for example, the effect period and the effect timing may be completely the same between the “hold change symbol effect effect” and the “character effect effect B”. The production period may be partially common.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the change display of the notice object, “change at shift”, “lightning action effect”, “treasure box opening effect effect”, “accessory effect effect”, or “change after reach” is executed. Thus, the display mode of the active display can be changed. As shown in FIG. 63, in the case of “change at shift”, the display mode of the active display changes immediately at the timing of the shift of the hold display (start of the variable display) without strictly accompanying the execution of the action effect. (At the beginning of the change). In the case of the “lightning effect effect”, the lightning effect effect is executed during the period at the start of the change, and the display mode of the active display changes. In the case of the “treasure box opening effect effect”, the treasure box effect effect is executed during the period at the start of the change, and the display mode of the active display changes. As shown in FIG. 63, the effect period of the “treasure box opening effect effect” is included in the effect period of the “lightning effect effect”. In addition, as long as the action effect is performed during the same fluctuation start period, the effect period and effect timing may be different between “lightning effect effect” and “treasure box opening effect effect”, or conversely, at all. Or the production timing may be the same.

  Further, in the case of the “casing effect effect”, the causal effect effect is executed during the middle period of the change, and the display mode of the active display changes. Further, in the case of “change after reach”, in the latter period of the fluctuation, strictly without an action effect, at a predetermined timing after the occurrence of the reach (for example, 5 seconds after the occurrence of the reach), the active display is performed. The display mode changes.

  As described above, a plurality of types of variable display times (non-reach variable times include a normal fluctuation time 12.5 seconds, a shortened fluctuation time 8.0 seconds, and a super shortened fluctuation time 2). .0 seconds) during the variable display time. Further, a change effect (effect effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display can be executed based on the determination result of the winning determination. And when the variable display is performed over a short variable display time of the plurality of types of variable display time, and when the variable display is performed over a long variable display time among the plurality of types of variable display time The number of timings at which the change effect (action effect) can be executed differs (as shown in FIG. 61A, only the “change at shift” at the start of the change can be executed in the change display of the ultra-short change. As shown in FIGS. 61 (B) and 61 (C), in the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation and the normal fluctuation, it is possible to execute the action effects in the middle period and the second period of the fluctuation in addition to the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, the timing at which the change effect (action effect) is executed changes according to the variable display time, so that the effect of the change effect (action effect) can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, when changing the display mode of the active display, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the effect control CPU 120 sets “change at shift” at the start of the change and “lightning action”. 61A, the effect after the reach can be executed in the middle stage of the change, and the post-reach change in the second half of the change. When the display mode of the display is changed, “change at shift” at the start of the change, “lightning effect effect”, “character effect effect” in the middle period of the change, “character effect effect A”, and “the character effect stage A” in the latter period of the change "Hold change symbol effect effect" and "character effect effect B" can be executed. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the change effect is different between when the mode of the hold display is changed and when the mode of the active display is changed, so that the effect of the change effect can be improved.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 54 (B), the execution ratio of the active change suggestion effect differs depending on the effect type of the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo consecutive effect as the special effect. When executed, the rate at which the active change suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the type of the pseudo continuous effect, so that the pseudo continuous effect and the active change suggestion effect are associated with each other to create interest in these effects. Can be improved.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 54 (C), when the execution ratio of the active change effect is different depending on the effect type such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, Since the rate of change in the active display mode after the active change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the pseudo sequential effect, the pseudo continuous effect and the active change suggestion effect are associated with each other to make these effects relevant. Interestingness can be improved.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 54 (A), depending on the effect type of the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo ream, the ratio controlled in the jackpot game state is different, so that the effect type of the pseudo ream effect is different. Based on this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to these effects.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 59, among a plurality of types of active change suggestion effect patterns such as a slot effect and an action effect, a ratio at which a specific active change suggestion effect pattern such as a slot effect and an effect effect is executed is as follows. Since it differs depending on the effect type of the pseudo continuous effect such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect type of the pseudo consecutive effect.

  (5) The same-color design effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 46 (D), and the same-color design effect can be executed as a pseudo continuous effect as shown in FIG. 46 (H). At least a part of the pseudo continuous production can be executed in a common production mode, so that when the pseudo pre-production is being performed, the player may have an illusion that the pre-reading production is being performed. By sharing the effects of the effects and the look-ahead effects, the interest in these effects can be further improved.

  (6) Like the blue same-color production, green same-color production, and red same-color production shown in FIG. 55, according to the same-color design production pattern history at the time of the pre-read production, the big hit expectation degree of the same color design production pattern executed at the time of the prefetch production Pseudo continuous production can be executed with the same color design production pattern of the above-mentioned degree of expectation. Thereby, the pseudo-sequence in the production mode of the expected degree which is equal to or higher than the expected degree in the production mode of the look-ahead production performed before the variable display for executing the pseudo consecutive production in the same color pattern production in the common mode as the pre-reading production Since the production is executable, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo continuous production is performed in the production mode of the degree of expectation that is higher than the expected level in the production mode of the look-ahead production. Can be improved.

  (7) FIGS. 46 (A) to (D), the pending change suggestion effect pattern at the time of the prefetch effect of FIG. 51, and the active change suggestion effect pattern at the time of the pseudo continuous effect of FIGS. 46 (E) to (I) and FIG. As shown in the above, since it is possible to execute the active change suggestion effect at the time of the pseudo continuous production in a manner in which the hold change suggestion production at the time of the pre-reading production is taken over, the prefetching production and the pseudo continuous production should be a series of production modes. It is possible to improve interest in these effects.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 46, FIGS. 49 to 50, and FIGS. 56 to 58, the hold display and the active display can be changed stepwise such that the hold display changes and then the active display changes. Since there is, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stage to which the mode of the active display changes, and it is possible to improve the interest of the effect.

  (9) As described in the third embodiment, it is possible to change a part of the production mode after the pseudo continuous production depending on the type of the pseudo continuous production, so that the effect of the pseudo continuous production can be further enhanced. Can be enhanced.

  (10) As shown in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), when the display mode of the active display is changed, “change at shift” at the start of the change, “lightning strike effect”, While it is possible to execute the “effect action effect” in the middle period of the fluctuation and the “change after reach” in the second period of the fluctuation, the display of the suspension display of the notice target is displayed as shown in FIGS. In the case of changing the mode, "change at shift" at the start of the change, "lightning effect effect", "character effect effect" in the middle period of the change, "character effect effect A", and "hold change pattern" in the latter period of the change Effect effect "and" character effect effect B "can be executed. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the change effect is different between when the mode of the hold display is changed and when the mode of the active display is changed, so that the effect of the change effect can be improved.

  A configuration example in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the first embodiment and the third embodiment, or the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment are combined will be described. A configuration example in which the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first embodiment and the third embodiment, or the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment are combined is, for example, as follows.

  A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols and effect symbols, etc.) and derive and display display results (big hit display results, loss display results). The movable bodies (for example, the first movable bodies 302L and 302R, the second movable body 402) provided in the first and second moving bodies (for example, the moving area E1 and the moving area E2) overlap with at least a part of the predetermined moving area. A light guide pattern (for example, a light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits the light from the front side) on the player side in the depth direction (for example, The light guide plate 501) and a special effect of temporarily stopping the variable display and restarting the variable display after the variable display is started and before the display result is derived and displayed (FIGS. 46E to 46E). ), (H), (I) or (J), (K) pseudo-run variation display, etc.), and special effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115; S802 in FIG. 45); During the execution of the display, a change corresponding display means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 or the like in FIG. 45) capable of performing a change corresponding display (such as the active display AH in FIG. 46) corresponding to the change display, During the execution of the fluctuation display, a mode changing means (active control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, S641, S642, S643 in FIG. 60, etc.) for changing (active change) the mode of the fluctuation corresponding display; Suggestion effect execution means (effect control microcontroller) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (such as a slot effect shown in FIGS. 46 (E) to (I)) indicating that the aspect of FIG. P. 115, S644, S645, etc. in FIG. 60), and the guiding is performed in at least a part of a moving period of the movable body (for example, a period from the start operation start time Ta2 to the advance operation end time Ta3). It is possible to execute a light emission effect of causing the predetermined light guide pattern of the light portion to emit light (for example, the light guide plate 501 is at least partially moved during the movement periods of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402). The special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effects together with a light emission effect of causing the predetermined light guide pattern to emit light (see FIGS. 23A, 27, and 28). (Same color design effect, NEXT design effect, etc. in FIG. 54 (A)), when the special effect is executed, the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed depends on the type of the special effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution ratio of an active change suggestion effect differs depending on the effect type of the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo-run, as shown in FIG. 54 (B).

  Alternatively, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols and effect symbols, etc.) and deriving and displaying a display result (big hit display result, loss display result), A movable body (for example, the first movable body 302L, 302R, the second movable body 402) movably provided overlaps with at least a part of a movable area (for example, the movable area E1, the movable area E2) of the movable body. A light guide section that forms a predetermined light guide pattern (for example, a light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 502 that has entered the inside from the right end face 501a forward and emits the light from the front) on the player side in the depth direction. (For example, the light guide plate 501) and a special effect of temporarily stopping the variable display and restarting the variable display after the variable display is started and before the display result is derived and displayed (FIG. 46 ( ) To (G), (H), (I) or (J), (K), etc., a special effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, etc.). ), And a fluctuation corresponding display means (effect control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45) capable of performing a fluctuation corresponding display (such as the active display AH in FIG. 46) corresponding to the fluctuation display during execution of the fluctuation display. Etc.), and mode changing means (production control microcomputer 115, S802 in FIG. 45, S641, S642, S643 in FIG. 60, etc.) for changing (actively changing) the mode of the fluctuation corresponding display during execution of the fluctuation display. A suggestion effect execution means (effect control system) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (such as a slot effect of FIGS. 46 (E) to (I)) indicating that the mode of the change correspondence display changes. Computer 115, S644, S645, etc. in FIG. 60), and at least a part of the movement period of the movable body (for example, a period from the start operation Ta2 to the end of the advance operation Ta3). It is possible to execute a light emission effect of causing the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide unit to emit light (for example, the light guide plate 501 during at least a part of the movement period of the first movable bodies 302L and 302R and the second movable body 402). 23 (A), 27 and 28), the special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effects. If there is (same color design effect, NEXT design effect, etc. in FIG. 54 (A)), when the special effect is executed, the change suggestion effect is executed according to the type of the special effect. (FIG. 54C), the execution ratio of the active change effect according to the effect type such as the same color symbol effect and the NEXT symbol effect in the pseudo-run. Gaming machine, etc.).

  According to the gaming machine of this configuration example, upon causing the light guide portion forming the light guide pattern overlapping the moving region of the movable body to emit light, the predetermined length of the light guide portion during at least a part of the moving period of the movable body It is possible to execute a light emission effect of causing the light guide pattern to emit light. For this reason, when the movable body moves, the light emission effect is executed, so that the movement of the movable body is difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the movement of the movable body, so that it is possible to improve the effect. In addition, when a special effect of temporarily suspending the variable display and resuming the variable display is performed from the start of the variable display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed, when the special display is performed, the variable response is performed according to the type of the special effect. The rate at which a change suggestion effect indicating that the display mode changes is executed is different. For this reason, the special effect and the suggestion effect can be associated with each other, and the interest in these effects can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the change suggestion effect may be an effect accompanied by movement of the movable body. In this example, the movement of the movable body at the time of executing the change suggestion effect can be visually recognized by the player, so that the effect of the effect can be improved and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. At this time, a change in the mode of the change corresponding display may be suggested based on the light guide pattern when the movable body moves. For example, when an active change occurs as a mode of the change correspondence display, the occurrence of the active change may be indicated by the color of the light emitted from the light guide pattern.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, when the movable body is located in any of its movable ranges, the movable correspondence display may be hidden by the movable body. In this example, when the mode of the change corresponding display is changed, the change corresponding display may be changed when the change corresponding display is hidden by the moved movable body. In this example, when the variable display temporarily hidden by the movable body becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player a pleasure as to whether or not the variable display is changed to the active display. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration example, the change correspondence display may be displayed on the movable body. In this case, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) as a display device may be attached to the movable body so that the display device can be moved, and the display corresponding to the fluctuation may be displayed on the display device. In addition, when displaying the change corresponding display on the movable body, the change corresponding display may not be visually recognized by, for example, passing behind a predetermined obstacle while the movable body is moving. In this case, when the display corresponding to the fluctuation displayed on the movable body is hidden, the display corresponding to the fluctuation may be changed. In this example, when the display corresponding to the change once hidden by the obstacle becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player a pleasure as to whether or not the display corresponding to the change has changed to the active display. It can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the special effect may be an effect involving movement of the movable body. In this example, the movement of the movable body at the time of executing the special effect can be made more visible to the player, so that the effect of the effect can be improved and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. At this time, the mode of the special effect may be changed based on the light guide pattern when the movable body moves. For example, when a special effect is performed, the same color symbol may be displayed or the NEXT symbol may be displayed according to the color emitted by the light guide pattern.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the above configuration example, when the movable body is located in any of the movable ranges thereof, at least a part of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be hidden by the movable body. Good. When a special effect is executed in this example, after the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are hidden by the moved movable body, the special effect is displayed when the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again. It may be executed. In this example, when the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R once hidden by the movable body become visible again, the player is given a pleasure as to whether or not the special effect is executed. It can contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be provided on the movable body. In this case, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) as a display device may be attached to the movable body to make the display device movable, and the display device may be provided with effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Further, when the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are provided on the movable body, the variation corresponding display cannot be visually recognized, for example, by passing behind a predetermined obstacle while the movable body is moving. It may be. In this case, the special effect may be executed when the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of the movable body is hidden and then the effect symbol is displayed again. In this example, after the effect once hidden by the obstacle becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player a pleasure as to whether or not the special effect is performed, thereby contributing to the enhancement of interest. Can be.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, they are included in the present invention. It is.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the above-described embodiment will be enumerated below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine showing an example in which two effect display devices are used as the effect display devices is not limited thereto, and one effect display device may be used. In addition, one effect display device may be used for a gaming machine showing an example in which one effect display device is used.

  (2) From the start of the variable display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed, the pseudo continuous production, which is a special production in which the variable display is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed, includes the same color design production and the NEXT design production. As a typical example, and a story pseudo continuous production is additionally shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of the pseudo continuous production that is a special production include a pseudo continuous production that temporarily stops a predetermined combination of pseudo continuous symbols called a pseudo continuous chance, and “continue” or “LOOP”. A predetermined image such as a character suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-sequence, in addition to the number pattern, or by using another pseudo-sequence effect such as a pseudo-sequence effect temporarily displayed by displaying separately from the number pattern Is also good.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, as an example in which the rate of change in the active display mode after the active change suggestion effect is executed differs according to the type of the pseudo continuous effect, all of the plurality of types of the pseudo continuous effect In the above example, an example in which an active change suggestion effect can be executed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of pseudo continuous effects in which an active change suggestion effect is not executed (the selection ratio of the active change suggestion effect is 0%) are provided. It may be included in the type of pseudo continuous production.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, when new hold storage information is generated based on a winning start, both the hold change effect pattern in the look-ahead effect and the active change effect pattern are selected first and stored. It may be stored as data, and an active change effect when an active display is performed may be executed based on the stored data.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the same-color design effect is executed, the effect mode (effect color) of the same-color design effect changes between the pre-reading effect and the pseudo continuous effect. An example of how to get it is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production mode (production color) of the same color pattern production is always maintained between the pre-reading production and the pseudo continuous production. May be executed.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 59, the same effect is continuously executed by the selection of the effect and the different effect is executed by the selection of the effect in the hold change suggestion effect and the active change suggestion effect. However, when the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the same effect as the effect of the hold change suggestion effect may always be performed in the active change suggestion effect.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47 (D) and FIG. 52, an example has been described in which the hold change effect is always executed when the hold change suggestion effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the hold change suggestion effect is executed, the hold change effect may not be executed at a predetermined rate. Conversely, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B), (C) and FIG. 60, even when the active change suggestion effect is executed, the active change effect is not executed at a predetermined rate. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active change effect may be executed whenever the active change suggestion effect is executed.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, in the case where the same-color design effect is executed as the pre-reading effect, when it is determined that the same-color design effect is to be executed, all of the held storage information existing at the time of the determination is added to The example in which the same color symbol effect is executed for the number of times of the variable display based on the above is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the same-color design effect is to be executed, and when there are a total of four pieces of pending storage information, the prefetching of the fluctuation display result of the pending storage information of the prefetch target is performed. , The ratio of executing the same color symbol effect a larger number of times when the jackpot display result is obtained than when the loss display result is obtained may be increased. By doing so, the degree of expectation of a big hit may vary depending on the number of times the same-color design effect is executed in the pre-reading effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Similarly, with regard to the number of times of performing the same color design effect in the pseudo continuous production, similarly, when the variable display is the big hit display result, the same color design effect is executed more times than when the loss display result is obtained. May be increased. By doing so, the degree of expectation of the big hit may vary depending on the number of times the same color symbol effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved. Also, by combining the control of the number of times the same-color design effect is performed in such a look-ahead effect and the control of the number of times the same-color design effect is performed in the pseudo continuous effect, the same-color design effect in the pre-reading effect Is performed, and the degree of expectation to be a big hit is made different depending on the total number of the number of times the same color symbol effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect and the number of times the same color pattern effect is executed (for example, the expected degree of a big hit is high) The higher the ratio of the total number is, the higher the total number of times is).

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the number of changes is only one in each of the pending change and the active change effect has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be selected once or a plurality of times (for example, changing in multiple steps such as white → blue → green).

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, a change effect such as a hold change effect or an active change effect is executed when the same color design effect is executed in the pre-reading effect and when the same color design effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect. The degree of expectation may be made different. In addition, the selection of the number of changes when a change effect such as a hold change effect or an active change effect is executed between when performing the same color design effect in the pre-reading effect and when performing the same color design effect in the pseudo continuous effect. The ratio may be different. Further, the ratio at which a change effect such as a hold change effect or an active change effect is actually executed differs between when the same color design effect is executed in the pre-reading effect and when the same color design effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect. You may. In addition, when a same-color design effect is executed in the pre-reading effect and when a same-color design effect is executed in the pseudo continuous effect, a big hit is expected when a change effect such as a hold change effect or an active change effect is executed. An effect control of different degrees may be executed.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of the same-color design effects can be executed in the pre-reading effect, and the degree of expectation that the hold change effect is executed may be changed according to the type of the same-color design effects. A plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pre-reading effect, and the selection ratio of the number of changes when the hold change effect is executed may be made different depending on the type of the same-color design effect to be executed. A plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pre-reading effect, and the rate at which the hold change effect is actually executed may be made different depending on the type of the same-color design effects to be executed. A plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pre-reading effect, and an effect control may be performed in which the degree of expectation of a big hit varies depending on the type of the same-color design effects to be executed.

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of the same-color design effects can be executed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the degree of expectation that the active change effect is executed is made different according to the type of the same-color design effects to be executed. You may. Also, a plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the selection ratio of the number of changes when the active change effect is executed may be made different according to the type of the same-color design effects to be executed. . Also, a plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pseudo continuous effect, and the rate at which the active change effect is actually executed may be made different according to the type of the same-color design effects to be executed. In addition, a plurality of types of same-color design effects can be executed in the pseudo continuous effect, and effect control may be performed such that the degree of expectation of a big hit varies depending on the type of the same-color design effects to be executed.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the type of the pending change effect to be executed among the plurality of the pending change effects provided is made different depending on whether or not to execute a plurality of types of the same color symbol effect in the prefetching effect. Is also good. Further, the selection ratio of the type of the held change effect to be executed among the plurality of types of the held change effects may be varied depending on whether or not to execute a plurality of types of the same color design effects in the pre-reading effect.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when the same-color design effect is executed in the pre-reading effect and when the same-color design effect is executed in the pseudo-continuous effect, when a specific look-ahead effect is performed in duplicate. In this case, the rate at which the pending change effect or the active change effect is executed may be higher than when the execution is not performed repeatedly.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the NEXT symbol effect is not executed as a look-ahead effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The NEXT symbol effect is a NEXT symbol each time a variable display is executed as a look-ahead effect. May be displayed at a predetermined timing.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggestion effect patterns shown in FIGS. 51 and 59, when the symbol of “change” stops, the effect of changing the hold display or the active display is executed. A plurality of character colors of the "change" symbol such as blue, green, and red may be provided, and the number of color change stages of the hold display or the active display may be changed depending on the character color of the stopped "change" symbol. . For example, if the character "character" of the stopped "change" pattern is blue, it changes one step, such as "white → blue", and the character "character" of the stopped "change" pattern is green. If there is, it may be changed in two steps such as “white → green”.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the execution frequency of the effect in which the mode of the active display changes varies depending on the type of the pseudo run, such as two pseudo runs, three pseudo runs, and four pseudo runs. Alternatively, the execution frequency may be the same. Further, regarding the change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the active display changes, regardless of whether or not the change of the mode of the active display succeeds, the execution frequency may be different depending on the type of the pseudo run, The execution frequency may be the same. Further, the execution frequency of the effect in which the mode of the active display changes, and the general change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the active display changes, the execution frequency may be different depending on the type of the pseudo-sequence, The execution frequency may be the same. Further, the success rate of the effect in which the active display changes (the change success rate when the change suggestion effect is executed) may be different depending on the type of the pseudo run, and the success rate may be the same. It may be. Further, with respect to the change suggestion effect that suggests that the mode of the active display changes, the effect mode may be different depending on the type of the pseudo run, or the effect mode may be the same.

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the prefetch effect is not executed when the number of reserved storages is not two or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect may be executed even when the number of reserved storages is not two or more.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states, such as a high probability state (probable state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, a specific example of a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as the “ratio (ratio, probability)”. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of the predetermined gaming state 1 and the occurrence ratio of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period are compared, and it is determined that “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio”, This also includes the case where the occurrence ratio of one game state is 0%.

  (21) It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all aspects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is played. The number of game balls used for the game is added while the number of rented balls that are enclosed in a circulating manner inside the machine and rented in response to a loan request by the player and the number of prize balls awarded in accordance with the prize are added. The present invention is also applicable to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored by subtraction. It should be noted that, in these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls, and thus the given points and points correspond to the game value.

  (23) In each of the above embodiments, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of a game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a game medium.

  (24) In the above embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a gaming value. And the variation display result is derived to a variation display device capable of varyingly displaying each of a plurality of types of identifiable symbols, thereby completing one game, and according to the variation display result derived to the variation display device. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated.

  In addition, about each structure shown in said 1st-4th embodiment, even if it applies only a part of structure to the game machine shown in other embodiment among 1st-4th embodiments Alternatively, all configurations may be applied to the gaming machines shown in other embodiments of the first to fourth embodiments.

1 Pachinko machine 103 CPU
120 Effect Control CPU
302L, 302R First movable body 307L, 307R Movable body LED
402 Second movable body 407A to 407D Movable body LED
500 light guide plate device 501 light guide plate 502 light guide plate LED
506 Light-emitting area 507 Non-light-emitting areas 507A to 507F Non-light-emitting section E Mechanical parts E1, E2 Moving area

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display and deriving and displaying a display result,
A movable body movably provided;
A predetermined light guide pattern is formed, a light guide portion disposed on the front side of the gaming machine than the movable body,
From the start of the variable display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed, a special effect execution unit capable of executing a special effect of temporarily suspending the variable display and then restarting the variable display,
A fluctuation corresponding display means capable of performing a fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuation display;
A mode changing unit configured to change a mode of the change corresponding display to one of a plurality of modes during execution of the change display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the change corresponding display changes,
A light emitting effect execution unit capable of executing a light emitting effect of causing the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide unit to emit light during at least a part of the moving period of the movable body,
With
Depending on the mode of the change corresponding display, the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs,
The special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effect,
As a mode at the time of temporary stop, a common mode at least partially common to a mode of a pre-reading effect executed based on a result of a pre-read determination by a pre-read determination unit that performs a pre-read determination on a variable display that has not been started yet. There are aspects,
The first special effect in which the mode at the time of the temporary stop is the common mode, and the second special effect different from the common mode in the mode at the time of the temporary stop are the types of the special effects, The degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state is different,
When the special effect is executed, the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of the special effect,
The special effect execution means may have an expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state, which is equal to or higher than an expectation degree corresponding to the look-ahead effect performed before the first special effect is executed. The first special effect is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that: A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display and deriving and displaying a display result,
A movable body movably provided;
A predetermined light guide pattern is formed, a light guide portion disposed on the front side of the gaming machine than the movable body,
From the start of the variable display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed, a special effect execution unit capable of executing a special effect of temporarily suspending the variable display and then restarting the variable display,
A fluctuation corresponding display means capable of performing a fluctuation corresponding display corresponding to the fluctuation display;
A mode changing unit configured to change a mode of the change corresponding display to one of a plurality of modes during execution of the change display;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect indicating that the mode of the change corresponding display changes,
A light emitting effect execution unit capable of executing a light emitting effect of causing the predetermined light guide pattern of the light guide unit to emit light during at least a part of the moving period of the movable body,
With
Depending on the mode of the change corresponding display, the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player differs,
The special effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the special effect,
As a mode at the time of temporary stop, a common mode at least partially common to a mode of a pre-reading effect executed based on a result of a pre-read determination by a pre-read determination unit that performs a pre-read determination on a variable display that has not been started yet. There are aspects,
The first special effect in which the mode at the time of the temporary stop is the common mode, and the second special effect different from the common mode in the mode at the time of the temporary stop are the types of the special effects, The degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state is different,
When the special effect is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the change corresponding display after the change suggestion effect is executed varies depending on the type of the special effect,
The special effect execution means may have an expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state, which is equal to or higher than an expectation degree corresponding to the look-ahead effect performed before the first special effect is executed. The first special effect is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

Images